Siebels Sppt

1050
i Module i: Siebel 8.0 Essentials Training Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Transcript of Siebels Sppt

Page 1: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1/1241

Module i: Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Training

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 2: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 2/1241

Module Agenda

This module provides an introduction to the:

Instructor and class participants

Training site information

Course:  Audience

Prerequisites

Goal

Objectives

Methodology Materials

 Agenda

Page 3: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 3/1241

Instructor and Class Participants

Who are you?

Name

Company

Role

What is your prior experience?

Siebel Applications

Relational database

How do you expect to benefit from this course?

Page 4: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 4/1241

Training Site Information

Bathrooms

Telephones

Fire Exits

Class duration and bre

Meals and refreshmen

Questions?

C A di

Page 5: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 5/1241

Course Audience

This course is designed for implementation teams

 Application developers

System architects and configurators

Database administrators

Systems administrators

C P i it

Page 6: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 6/1241

Course Prerequisites

Basic Windows or NT navigation and file-manageme

Understanding of basic relational database concepts

Familiarity with application development

Familiarity with Web-based and client/server applica

C G l

Page 7: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 7/1241

Course Goal

To enable participants to identify and perform tasks

an initial Siebel 8 Application deployment

C Obj ti

Page 8: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 8/1241

Course Objectives

Navigate the Siebel application user interface

Secure access to Siebel applications and data

Define your company structure

Describe the Siebel application architecture

Describe the steps required to install Siebel applicat

to set up your enterprise

Configure a Siebel application

 Automate business rules in your Siebel application

Populate and migrate data into the Siebel database

Migrate data between environments

Course Methodology

Page 9: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 9/1241

Course Methodology

Subject matter is delivered via:

Lecture and slide presentations

Software demonstrations

Class discussions Hands-on labs

Course Materials

Page 10: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 10/1241

Course Materials

Student Guide

 All slides presented during lecture

Notes that point to Siebel Bookshelf references

Lab Guide Hands-on lab exercises and solutions

Page 11: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 11/1241

Page 12: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 12/1241

Course Agenda Continued

Page 13: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 13/1241

Course Agenda Continued

Installation and Security

12: Securing Access to the Application

13: Installing Siebel Applications

Siebel Application Architecture 14: Siebel Application Architecture

15: Using Siebel Tools to Examine Object Definitions

16: The Siebel Data Model

17: Siebel Business Components

18: Siebel Party Business Components

19: Siebel Business Objects

20: Configuration Strategy

21: The Configuration Process

Course Agenda Continued

Page 14: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 14/1241

Course Agenda Continued

 Application Configuration

22: Managing Object Definitions

23: Editing and Compiling Object Definitions

24: UI Layer Configuration: Web Templates 25: UI Layer Configuration: Applets

26: UI Layer Configuration: Applications, Screens, and

27: UI Layer Configuration: Drilldowns

28: Business Layer Configuration: Joins

29: Business Layer Configuration: Existing Business Cand Fields

30: Business Layer Configuration: New Business Com

Fields

31: Business Layer Configuration: Picklists

32: Configuring Multi-Value Groups

33: Data Layer Configuration

Page 15: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 15/1241

Course Agenda Continued

Page 16: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 16/1241

Course Agenda Continued

Configuring Business Logic (Continued)

47: Invoking Siebel Assignment Manager 

48: State Models

Data Loads 49: Introducing Enterprise Integration Manager 

50: Creating Data Maps

51: Running Enterprise Integration Manager 

 Application Deployment

52: Introducing Application Deployment Manager 

53: Deploying Application Customizations

Summary

Page 17: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 17/1241

Summary

This module provides an introduction to the:

Instructor and class participants

Training site information

Course:  Audience

Prerequisites

Goal

Objectives

Methodology

Materials

 Agenda

Page 18: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 18/1241

Page 19: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 19/1241

Module 1: Introducing Siebel

Applications

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Module Objectives

Page 20: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 20/1241

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Describe Siebel Customer Relationship Management (

applications and how they are classified

Identify the common business entities found in Siebel Capplications

Why you need to know:

You need to be familiar with Siebel applications to unde

context of this course

Siebel Customer Relationship Management (CRM

Page 21: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 21/1241

Siebel Customer Relationship Management (CRM

Enables you to manage interactions with customers, p

and employees

Typically deployed as a single application with broad fu

Supports multiple communication channels Web and email

Call center 

Field service

Uses a single database to:

 Allow all users access to the same set of data

Example: The correct customer order status is seen by al

users

Ensure changes to data are made once and only once

Example: An address needs to be updated in only one pla

Is a packaged application with built-in best practices

Siebel CRM Applications

Page 22: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 22/1241

Siebel CRM Applications

 Are available tailored for:

Different types of customer, partner, or employee intera

channels (horizontal applications)

Different industries (industry applications)

Examples:

Horizontal applications

Siebel Sales

Siebel Call Center 

Siebel Partner Portal

Siebel Remote

Industry applications

Siebel Finance

Siebel Consumer Goods

Types of Siebel Enterprise Applications

Page 23: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 23/1241

yp p pp

Employee applications

 Are used by internal employees

Examples include:

Siebel Call Center  Siebel Sales

Customer and partner applications

 Are used by customers and partners

Examples include:

Siebel eSales

Siebel Partner Portal

Employee Application: Siebel Sales

Page 24: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 24/1241

p y pp

Siebel Sales may be used by a company’s sales repr

and managers to manage accounts, sales opportuniti

contacts

Siebel Sales

Opportunities screen

Employee Application: Siebel Call Center 

Page 25: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 25/1241

p y pp

Siebel Call Center may be used by a company’s teles

service representativesSiebel Call Center

service screen

Customer Application: Siebel eSales

Page 26: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 26/1241

pp

May be used by customers to purchase products ove

Includes an interactive product catalog, search and pr

comparison mechanisms, and online ordering capabil

Shopping cartProduct catalog

Partner Application: Siebel Partner Portal

Page 27: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 27/1241

pp

May be used by a company’s partners to communicat

collaborate, and conduct business with a Web-based

Pa

oppor

Page 28: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 28/1241

Siebel User Interface (UI) Modes

Page 29: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 29/1241

High Interactivity Mode

Standard Interactivity Mode

The Siebel UI is rendered in one of two modes:

High Interactivity Mode

Page 30: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 30/1241

Is available for employee applications, supporting hig

interactive users

Uses additional code, such as Active X controls, to pr

functionality Drag-and-drop for setting column widths

Explorer-like hierarchy views

Menu bar and tool bars

Saving records by moving off the current line

Requires Internet Explorer (check documentation for v

Standard Interactivity Mode

Page 31: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 31/1241

Is available for customer and employee applications

Designed to be less browser-dependent

Behaves like a typical HTML-based Web application

 Available on a wide variety of browsers (check documfor supported browsers)

Page 32: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 32/1241

Common Siebel Business Components

Page 33: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 33/1241

Service Requests

Contacts

Opportunities

 Accounts

 Assets

Accounts

Page 34: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 34/1241

 Are businesses external to your company

Represent a current or potential client, a business par

competitor 

 Are associated with a team

Page 35: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 35/1241

Opportunities

Page 36: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 36/1241

 Are potential revenue-generating events

Have the following characteristics:

 A possible association with an account

 A probability of completion

 A close date

 Are associated with a team

Service Requests

Page 37: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 37/1241

 Are requests from customers or prospects for informa

assistance with your products or services

Have the following characteristics:

 A status

 A severity level

 A priority level

 Are associated with a single owner 

Assets

Page 38: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 38/1241

 Are instances of purchased products

Have the following characteristics:

 An asset number 

 A product and part number 

 A status level

Module Highlights

Page 39: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 39/1241

Siebel CRM applications allow you to manage all cust

points of contact

Types of Siebel CRM enterprise applications are:

Employee applications: Siebel Call Center, Siebel Sale

on

Customer applications: Siebel eSales, Siebel Partner P

so on

Common Siebel business components include:

 Accounts

Contacts

Opportunities

Service requests

 Assets

Page 40: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 40/1241

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 41: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 41/1241

Module 2: Using the Siebel Web Client

Module Objectives

Page 42: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 42/1241

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Start and log in to a Siebel application

Navigate screens and views in the application

Identify major user interface (UI) features in a Siebel C

application

Why you need to know:

Understanding the UI enables you to effectively use an

Siebel applications

Logging In to a Siebel Application

Page 43: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 43/1241

Start a Siebel application in a Web browser by enterin

application’s URL

Log in using assigned user ID and password

Use

pa

 Application URL

Application URLs

A Si b l li ti ’ URL i f d f

Page 44: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 44/1241

 A Siebel application’s URL is formed from :

 Application’s Web server name

 Application name

Suffix identifying the application language

Examples:

http://AppServer0.MyCompany.com/callcenter_enu

Web server name: Appserver0.MyCompany.com

 Application name: callcenter (Siebel Call Center

Language suffix: _enu (American English)

http://public.MyCompany.com/esales_fraWeb server name: public.MyCompany.com

 Application name: esales (Siebel eSales)

Language suffix: _fra (French)

Application Home Page

Di l d ft l i t Si b l li ti

Page 45: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 45/1241

Displayed after log-in to a Siebel application

Personalized data

provides direct links

to common tasks

Personal

by clicki

Page 46: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 46/1241

Page 47: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 47/1241

Global Toolbar: iHelp and Reports

Access context sensitive tasks and reports associated

Page 48: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 48/1241

 Access context-sensitive tasks and reports associated

current screen

Click the How Do I button to

access iHelp, which provides

guidance with tasks

Click the Rep

access rep

screen you a

Global Toolbar: Site Map

Access a list of all application areas available to the u

Page 49: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 49/1241

 Access a list of all application areas available to the u

Site Map listsapplication

areas

Site Map button

Drilling down on

an area shows

detailed

navigation

Screens

Represent groups of related data for a functional busi

Page 50: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 50/1241

Represent groups of related data for a functional busi

such as accounts, contacts, or opportunities

Screen tab

Link ba

to othe

rela

Screen Home Pages

Some screens have home pages that provide quick a

Page 51: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 51/1241

Some screens have home pages that provide quick a

common end-user tasks and data

Links to

different sets

of records

Guid

com

Links to

recentrecords

Navigating

Click the different UI elements to navigate to different

Page 52: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 52/1241

Click the different UI elements to navigate to different

Link bar 

View tabs

Row indicator

Screen tabs

Selected record

Views

A view consists of one or more applets displaying rec

Page 53: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 53/1241

 A view consists of one or more applets displaying rec

View tab

Drop-Down Menu Screen and View Navigation

Access additional tabs and links using drop-down arro

Page 54: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 54/1241

 Access additional tabs and links using drop down arro

 Available if needed for screen tabs, link bar, and view ta

Click drop-do

to display mochoices

Drill down on a hyperlink to see more information

Hyperlinks

Page 55: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 55/1241

Drill down on a hyperlink to see more information

...navigates you to the

 Account Detail -

Contacts view

Clicking account

hyperlink…

List Applets and Form Applets

Views are made up of one or more applets

Page 56: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 56/1241

Views are made up of one or more applets

List applet displays records in rows

Form applet displays a single record in a two-dimensio

Selected record

Navigating List Applets and Form Applets

Use the Menu button or scroll bars and arrows

Page 57: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 57/1241

Right-click fo

menu

Form appletnavigation arro

 Applet-specific menu items

Standard applet

buttons

Freezing List Columns

Freeze position in list columns

Page 58: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 58/1241

p

Freeze columns by double-clicking column headers wit

applets

Enhances ability to work effectively with lists that contain

columns of data Drag and drop columns in and out of the frozen area

Double-click column

header to freeze (or

unfreeze) columnsScrolling horizo

through colum

leaves froze

columns in pl

Page 59: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 59/1241

Displaying More Records Click the Show More button in the top-right corner of a

Page 60: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 60/1241

p g

applet to toggle display of more records

Setting User Preferences  Allows users to set individual preferences for some ap

Page 61: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 61/1241

features

Set time zone preferences

Set a startup view

Change default spell check options

Customize aspects of the calendar  Select User Prefere

from the application

Tools menu

New sc

appeaLink bar

categorizes

preferences

Module Highlights  A Siebel application consists of Web pages that displa

Page 62: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 62/1241

 A screen is a grouping of views in a major application

area

 A view consists of one or more applets as well as link

used to navigate within the view

 A list applet displays multiple records in table form

 A form applet displays a single record

Lab In the lab you will:

Page 63: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 63/1241

Practice navigating in Siebel Call Center 

Page 64: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 64/1241

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 65: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 65/1241

Module 3: Working With Siebel Data

Module Objectives  After completing this module you should be able to:

Page 66: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 66/1241

Create, modify, and delete records

Query for records in a Siebel CRM application

Why you need to know:

Knowing these skills is important for understanding an

configuring Siebel applications

Working with Data in the Siebel User Interface (U

Page 67: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 67/1241

Modifying and Saving Data

Using Picklists and Multi-Value Groups

Sorting Data

Creating Data

Deleting Data

Creating Data Select Menu > New Record or click the New button t

d

Page 68: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 68/1241

new record

Creating DataContinued

Enter data in list or form applet

Page 69: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 69/1241

Some fields are required:

Marked with a red asterisk in a form applet

Default value may be provided automatically

Required field

indicated by red

asterisk

Required field

populated with

default value

Modifying and Saving Data Modify data

Page 70: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 70/1241

Select field in the list or form and change it

Save data implicitly

Step off the record in a list or a form to commit it to the

 Available in High Interactivity interface

Save data explicitly

Click Menu and select Save Record

Keyboard: CTRL+S

Explicit save

Page 71: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 71/1241

Attachments

 Are files created in other applications that can be as

records in Siebel applications

Page 72: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 72/1241

records in Siebel applications

Can be related to records wherever the Attachments

available within a screen

Drag and drop a file into the Attachments list view, or 

Use the New File or New URL button

Use New F

URL to c

attachDrag and drop file to

create an attachment

Using Picklists

Picklists allow user to select a field value from a list

T t f i kli t

Page 73: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 73/1241

Two types of picklist:

Static: User selects a value from a fixed drop-down lis

Dynamic: User selects a value from list of changing va

Examples: Accounts, Opportunities, Contacts

Dynamic picklist

Select button

opens pick applet

Sta

uses

Multi-value groups (MVGs) assign one or more value

in a record

Using Multi-Value Groups

Page 74: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 74/1241

in a record

Only the primary value will be displayed in a list or fo

MVG Select button

 Associate members

to the account team

Sorting Data

Click a column header to sort data in ascending or d

order

Page 75: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 75/1241

order 

Click the column header for ascending

(A – Z) or descending (Z – A) order

Page 76: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 76/1241

Deleting Data

Delete a record by:

Select Menu > Delete Record

Page 77: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 77/1241

Select Menu > Delete Record

Click Delete button

CTRL+D

Some records may be read-only

Confirm delete

Querying for Data in the Siebel UI

Page 78: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 78/1241

Using the Query Assistant

Querying an MVG Field

Refining a Query

Running and Executing a Query

Saving a Query

Executing Predefined and Saved Queries

Running and Executing a Query

Query for records inline within a form or list applet us

the following methods:

Page 79: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 79/1241

the following methods:

Query button on an applet

Query from applet-level and application-level menus

Run Query item in context menu (accessed by right-c

Rig

con

Page 80: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 80/1241

Query Operators

Relational operators can be used on numeric or date

< (less than)

Page 81: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 81/1241

(less than)

> (greater than)

= (equal to)

<= (less than or equal to)

>= (greater than or equal to)

<> (not equal to) can be used on all fields

Example:

Find dates on or after 1/1/2006

Date field in query is set to: >= 1/1/2006

Page 82: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 82/1241

Page 83: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 83/1241

Using the Query Assistant

Provides a simplified way for users to execute querie

anywhere in a Siebel application

Page 84: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 84/1241

Guides users through creating a query

Users do not have to be familiar with query syntax or

Click Query Assistant button after clicking Query in a

Select any field

from the current

screen

Select fields a

operators usin

drop-down lis

Tw

com

f

Querying an MVG Field

Use EXISTS() to search for matches in multi-value g

(MVGs)

Page 85: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 85/1241

Only way to query all child records in an MVG

Example: Searching for the string “*Street” in the addr

account  An account can have multiple addresses

Query matches all accounts with one or more addresses

the sub-string “Street”

MVG indicator 

Search criterion

Querying an MVG Field Continued

Search results show records where at least one valu

MVG matches the search criteria

Page 86: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 86/1241

Example:

Search results include accounts with string “*Street” in a

address

Th

ha

m

Record

detail for

 Ace

Properties

Use Refine Query to modify an existing query

Refining a Query

Page 87: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 87/1241

1. Select Refine Query

3. Query results reflect

original and modified criteria

2. Enter additional

or modified criteria Original criterion

Saving a Query

Use the application-level Query menu to save a que

Page 88: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 88/1241

1. Select Query > Save

Query As

2. Name the query and click OK

Executing Predefined and Saved Queries

Predefined queries are provided by an application ad

Cannot be deleted by an end user 

Page 89: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 89/1241

 Additional saved queries are created and saved by t

 All saved and predefined queries appear in the Save

drop-down list

Created and

Predefined and

saved queries in

alphabetical

order 

Module Highlights

Creating and editing data may involve using:

Required and optional fields

Page 90: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 90/1241

Drop-down lists

MVG fields

 Attachments

Siebel applications support complex queries on data

Wildcards

Logical and numerical operators

Support for searching multi-value group (MVG) fields

The Query Assistant helps end users form complex q

Commonly-executed queries may be saved

Lab

In the lab you will:

Create, modify, and delete records

Page 91: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 91/1241

Use basic querying skills

Page 92: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 92/1241

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 93: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 93/1241

Module 4: Responsibilities andViews

Page 94: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 94/1241

Business Challenge

Large-scale enterprise applications should not grant a

access to the entire application, for example:

Most users should not have access to system administ

Page 95: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 95/1241

Most users should not have access to system administ

Most users should not have access to all data in the ap

for example:

Employee salaries, sales contracts, and other sensitive d

Data not related to the employee’s job function

 Application administrators require a mechanism to res

access to views and data

Ideally, the restriction mechanisms should be independ

another:

One mechanism to restrict access to views

 A separate mechanism to restrict access to data

Business Solution: Access Control

Siebel applications provide mechanisms known as Ac

Control to restrict views and data seen by users

Responsibilities control access to views

Page 96: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 96/1241

Responsibilities control access to views

Subject of this module

Positions control access to data Subject of subsequent module

These Access Control mechanisms are independent of

another 

Views and Job Functions

Users should see only those views required to perform

functions

Improves efficiency for the user

Page 97: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 97/1241

Improves efficiency for the user 

Improves business security by preventing unauthorized

sensitive or administrative views

The System Administrator has many more administrative views th

Call Center Agent. Notice that even the set of screen tabs is diffe

System Administrator  Call Cen

Responsibilities

 Are collections of views associated with a job function

 All of the views necessary to perform that particular job

Are assigned to users according to their job functions

Page 98: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 98/1241

 Are assigned to users according to their job functions

Users may have more than one job function, hence m

more than one responsibility

UResponsibilitiesViews

Responsibilitiescontain one or

more views

 Assign usersone or more

responsibilities

Properties of Responsibilities

 A view may be contained in multiple responsibilities

For example, the Home Page View of an application sh

included in every responsibility used to access that app

Page 99: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 99/1241

included in every responsibility used to access that app

Multiple users may share the same responsibility

For example, Call Center agents

UResponsibilitiesViews

The same view may becontained by multiple

responsibilities

Multiple users mshare the same

responsibility

Seed Responsibilities

 Are a set of responsibilities provided with the Siebel a

 Automatically created during application installation

Cannot be modified or deleted

Page 100: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 100/1241

Cannot be modified or deleted

May be copied to create new, editable responsibilities

Seed responsibilities

are created when the

application is installed

Creating New Responsibilities

If the existing seed responsibilities are not sufficient fo

business requirements, create new responsibilities as

New responsibilities may be edited or deleted

Page 101: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 101/1241

New responsibilities may be edited or deleted

Create new responsibilities

for customized, editable

responsibilities

Assigning Responsibilities to Users

 Assign responsibilities to users according to their job

Users with multiple responsibilities see the union of the

Users with no responsibilities see nothing

Page 102: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 102/1241

Users with no responsibilities see nothing

Critical to remember to assign responsibilities to partners

customers

CCHENG h

responsibilities, an

all of the views

Click the Select up the Respo

Primary Responsibilities

 Assign each user a primary responsibility

Determines the initial tab layout when the user logs in

 Administrator determines the initial layout

Page 103: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 103/1241

y

User can edit personal preferences to create a different la

CCHENG’s primary responsibility

is Universal Agent (B2B+B2C),

so she initially sees the tab layout

for that responsibility

Page 104: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 104/1241

1. Copy or Create a Responsibility

Navigate to the Administration – Application > Respon

view

Copy an existing responsibility with a set of views sim

Page 105: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 105/1241

py g p y

requirements

 Alternatively, create a new responsibility to start withoviews

Right-click and select

Copy Record to create a

duplicate responsibility

1. Copying or Creating Responsibilities

Copying seed responsibilities:

Provides a “quick start” in creating responsibilities with

numbers of views

Page 106: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 106/1241

May provide far more views than your business logic re

Seed responsibilities frequently contain hundreds of view

Inefficient for inexperienced users

May include inappropriate administrative views

Creating new responsibilities:

 Allows fine-tuning of application logic to exactly match

requirements

Users see only those views that your company has decidrequire to perform their job functions

Requires determining exactly which views a user may r

adding those views to the responsibility

2. Add or Remove Views

 Add or remove views from the responsibility as neces

 A pick applet provides querying functionality and impr

efficiency when selecting views

Page 107: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 107/1241

y g

1. Click Add to add

views to a responsibility

2. Pick a

querying

multiple

Page 108: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 108/1241

2. Clear the Cache

Clear the responsibility cache to ensure that users wil

updated responsibilities the next time they log in

Page 109: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 109/1241

Click Clear Cache to clear the

responsibility cache after creatingor modifying responsibilities

3. Test the Responsibility

 Assign the responsibility to a sample user 

Use the Administration – User > Users view

Log in as that user and verify the available views from

Page 110: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 110/1241

Map

Users only see references to views that are contained responsibilities

Examine the Site Ma

that only views assoc

responsibility are

Page 111: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 111/1241

Module Highlights

Responsibilities are collections of views used to limit th

visible to a user 

Responsibilities have a M:M relationship with views an

Page 112: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 112/1241

Create responsibilities by copying and editing seed

responsibilities or by creating new responsibilities Assign responsibilities to a user and clear the respons

cache before testing a responsibility

Page 113: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 113/1241

Page 114: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 114/1241

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 115: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 115/1241

Module 5: Users, Positions, andOrganizations

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Describe how data access is controlled by users, position

organizations

Implement the company structure using divisions organi

Page 116: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 116/1241

Implement the company structure using divisions, organi

positions, users, and employees

Why you need to know:

 Access to some data within the application is controlled b

positions, and organizations

Implementing your company's structure enables role- and

organization-specific functionality in Siebel CRM

Business Challenge

Large-scale enterprise applications should not grant a

access to all of the data within the application

For example, sales representatives should see their ow

quota attainment but no one else’s

Page 117: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 117/1241

quota attainment, but no one else s

On the other hand, sales managers should see all of th

quota attainments

System administrators require a mechanism to restric

data within the application

This mechanism should be independent of the mechan

restrict access to views

Business Solution: Access Control

Siebel applications allow different users to see differe

based on their user ID, position, or organization within

company

Data access control is independent of responsibilities a

Page 118: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 118/1241

Data access control is independent of responsibilities a

Example: Ted Arnold and Casey Cheng can access the

based on their responsibilities, but see different data in

Users

 Are individuals who use the Siebel application

May be employees, customers, or partners

Require unique user IDs

R i l ibili i i h

Page 119: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 119/1241

Require at least one responsibility to see views in the

application Note that multiple users can

have the same name as long

as their user ID is different

Users m

lea

responsi

will see

Employees

 Are a special type of user representing employees of

company

Employees have one or more positions within the comp

Each position belongs to an organization within the com

Page 120: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 120/1241

Users

Each position belongs to an organization within the com

Employees

Employees are users who have

positions that belong to organizations

Responsibilities All users have

responsibilities, whether or

not they are employees

OrganizPositions

Positions

Positions are used to control access to data within the

application

For example, a sales representative’s accounts are onl

members of his or her sales team

Page 121: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 121/1241

members of his or her sales team

Employees may have one or more positions

One position is designated as the primary position, and

position employees occupy when they log in

Employees only see data for their current position

Employees may change positions once they have logg

Changing Positions

If an employee has more than one position, he or she

change position during a session

From the application-level Tools menu, select User Pre

Change Position

Page 122: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 122/1241

C a ge os o

Becomes the Active Position for that session

Changing the default login (primary) position for an em

an administrator function

Position Hierarchy

Positions are arranged in a hierarchy

Defines a reporting structure that allows managers to s

from their direct and indirect reports

The Administration Group > Positions view shows thi

Page 123: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 123/1241

The Administration – Group > Positions view shows thi

 Also shows the primary for each position

The VP of Sales position can see

data for the Eastern Sales Manager

and Eastern Sales Rep positions

Page 124: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 124/1241

Example: MegaCorp Organizational Structure

Here is a sample organizational structure of a sample

MegaCorp

MegaCorp HQ

Default Organization Default

Organization

the root of th

hi h

 All divisions belonging to

D f lt O i ti h

Page 125: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 125/1241

MegaCorp

Training

MegaCorp HQ

MegaCorp

Sales

NA Sales EMEASales

Internal

TrainingCustomer

Training

FinancialServices

PubSec

PartnerSales

European

Partners

ASIA/PAC

Partners

Mega

Cons

hierarchy

Partner organizations

created to segregate

data

Default Organization share

the same data access

Positions and Divisions

 A position is assigned to one, and only one, division

 A position is associated with one, and only one, organ

The organization to which the division belongs

Page 126: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 126/1241

This position is associated with

the MegaCorp East Sales

division, which belongs to the

Default Organization

The Eastern Sa

position is assMegaCorp East

Example: NA Sales with Positions and Users

The NA Sales division (part of Default Organization) m

users and positions that look something like this:

MegaCorp NA Sales L

VP f S l

Page 127: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 127/1241

MegaCorp East SaleMegaCorp West Sales

Eastern Sales

Manager 

Peter Summers

Western

Sales Rep 1

Todd Oleak

Western

Sales Rep 2

Marion May

Western Sales

Manager 

Sean Murphy

Eastern

Sales Rep 1

Kelly Wilson

Easter

Re

Wasaka

VP of Sales

Chris Miller O

MegaCorp West Sales MegaCorp East Sale

Implementing the Company Structure

1. Create Divisions and Division Hierarchy

Page 128: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 128/1241

2. Label Some Divisions as Organizations

3. Create Positions

4. Create Employees

5. Create Users

1. Create Divisions and Division Hierarchy

Create divisions in the Administration – Group > Inter

Divisions view

Required fields are division name and currency

Be careful: Once divisions are created they cannot be d

Page 129: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 129/1241

y

Page 130: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 130/1241

3. Create Positions

Create Positions on the Administration – Group > Pos

Positions require a name and a division

Siebel applications provide some seed positions such

 Administrator 

Page 131: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 131/1241

Recommended practice: Do not delete positions, as t

related to data

The Siebel application has four seed

positions, including Siebel Administrator 

4. Create Employees

Use the Administration – User > Employees view to c

employees

Employee will also appear as a user 

Required fields are First Name, Last Name, User ID,

Page 132: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 132/1241

and Organization

By default, new employee records are in the same org

as the person creating the record

Used for access control of visibility of employee record

Can be changed to reflect appropriate access control

5. Create Users

Some users will not be employees

For examples, customers and partners

Create them in the Administration – Users > Users vie

Customers and partners require responsibilities, but no

Page 133: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 133/1241

p q p

Module Highlights

Users are individuals who log in to the application

Require responsibilities

Employees are special users representing employees

company

Page 134: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 134/1241

Hold at least one position

Belong to at least one organization

Positions are similar to job titles, and are used to deter

data an employee can see

Divisions represent divisions within the company

Organizations are specialized divisions used to limit da

Lab

In the lab you will:

Implement a company structure, including divisions, org

positions, and employees

Page 135: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 135/1241

Page 136: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 136/1241

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 137: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 137/1241

Module 6: Controlling Access to

Customer Data

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Describe the difference between customer and master da

applications

Describe the different Access Control mechanisms used

access to data in Siebel applications

Page 138: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 138/1241

access to data in Siebel applications

Identify the different view types used for different types o

Why you need to know:

To effectively use and administer Siebel applications, you

understand how access to data is controlled

Understanding view types is essential to properly assignresponsibilities

Business Challenge

Users often perform the same job functions but on dif

of data

For example, sales representatives need access to the

their own accounts, but not each others’

Access to some data in the enterprise needs to be res

Page 139: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 139/1241

 Access to some data in the enterprise needs to be res

Users should only see records they need to do their job

Users should easily locate records of interest

Business Solution: Access Control for Data

Siebel applications provide mechanisms to restrict ac

certain records based on:

The employee

The employee's position

Th iti ’ i ti

Page 140: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 140/1241

The position’s organization

Limited access to data:

Increases business security

Increases user productivity

Relationship Between Views and Data

 Access to views is independent of access to data

But the view defines the Access Control mechanism th

used to access data

Data displayed within a view is based on the Access C

mechanism for the view

Page 141: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 141/1241

mechanism for the view

Example: Ted Arnold and Casey Cheng can access thebased on their responsibilities, but see different data in

Casey Cheng

(CCHENG) sees

only her own

service requests

Ted Arnold

(TARNOLD) can

access the same view

but sees only his own

service requests there

Page 142: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 142/1241

Accessing Customer Data

Individual records may be restricted by employee, posorganization, or a combination thereof 

Data visibility is determined by Siebel-set properties of

underlying business component (BC)

Visibility may be restricted to an individual employee p

Page 143: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 143/1241

Visibility may be restricted to an individual employee, p

organization, or multiple employees, positions, or organ

Employees are

assigned to

positions. Each

position is

assigned to one

and only oneorganization

Record visibility is restricted by a combinat

position, and organization, depending on th

Records

Employee

Position

Organization

Viewing Customer Data

For customer data that is access controlled, visibility idetermined using the following drop-down visibility filt

My views

My Team’s views

All views

Page 144: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 144/1241

 All views

 All Across My Organizations views

 All Across Organizations views

 Assigning the appropriate views to the appropriate

responsibilities is critical for data access control

The visibility filter dro

down list shows the vie

available according to

user’s responsibilitie

Page 145: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 145/1241

My Personal Views

 Are used to display records directly owned by you or yposition

 Are special-case views that are rarely used (for exam

Contacts)

Page 146: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 146/1241

 A sales agent onsees contacts fo

which he or she

the direct owne

My Team’s Views

 Are an additional view for managers that allow them trecords assigned to their direct and indirect reports

For records with teams of positions, only records where

primary is the direct or indirect report are displayed

Manager does not have to be assigned to the record

Page 147: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 147/1241

g g

 Are typically assigned only to manager responsibilitie  Are implemented using the position hierarchy

Manager sees only the acc

for which the manager’s d

or indirect reports are th

primary position on the acc

All Views

 Are used to show all records belonging to your currenorganization

The organization of your current position

Not related to My or My Team’s views, which are perso

position oriented

Page 148: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 148/1241

p

 A service age

the service

assigned to

organiz

regardless of

Customer Data and Organizations

By default, when a record is created it is associated worganization of the creator’s current position

To change the organization associated with a record,

More Info view

Records may be associated with multiple organizations

Page 149: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 149/1241

Records may be associated with multiple organizations

 A record’s Organ

usually shown unde

Info tab in the de

All Across My Organizations Views

 Are used to display all data from an organization and organizations

Based on the relationships specified by the organizatio

hierarchy

 Are typically restricted to users who need to access re

Page 150: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 150/1241

yp y

the enterprise level Mid-level executives

Partners

 Are typically used for only a few types of records

For example, opportunities

In the All Opportunities Across My Organizations view, manager sees all opportunities in his or her organizatio

its child organizations

All Across Organizations Views

 Are used to show all records in the enterprise that arean organization

 Are typically restricted to only those users who need t

records across the whole company

Top-level executives

Page 151: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 151/1241

p

 A vice

sales

service r

have be

Administration Views

 Are used to display all database records, even those valid owner 

For example, records that have just been imported but

assigned or records where the primary position has bee

 Are accessed from the Administration views for each

Page 152: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 152/1241

entity Should be restricted to a few users in the enterprise a

display all records in the database

 Administration view

separate from the v

filter drop-down

Summary: Types of Views

Displays records directly assigned to you based o

active positionMy View

Only displays records you directly ownMy Personal View

DescriptionViews

Page 153: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 153/1241

 Allows managers to see records assigned to theirindirect reports that are the primary owner based

structure

My Team’s View (Manager’s View)

Displays all records associated with the user’s org All View

Displays records that are assigned to the user’s o

and its child organizations All Across My Organizations View

Display all records in the database, even those w

organization Administration Views

Displays all records in the enterprise with a valid o All Across Organizations View

Page 154: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 154/1241

Best Practices for Views Continued

 All Views: Individual contributors may or may not need access

Call center agents should be able to see all of a company

requests, hence should have an All Service Requests vie

Sales representatives may or may not need to see all opp

within their organization depending on the business mod

Page 155: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 155/1241

within their organization, depending on the business mod

 All views are typically restricted to users who need to a

records at the organization level

Executives, administrators

Service agents who need to access all service requests

 All Across Organizations Views:

These views are usually reserved for upper managers executives

Exception: Call center agents may need to see all service

filed by a customer worldwide, hence may need access to

Review: Access to Customer Data

Can be restricted by assigning individual records to: Employees (specified by employee’s user ID)

Positions

Organizations

Page 156: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 156/1241

Using Multiple Access Control Mechanisms

 A record can be restricted by more than one Access Cmechanism

Mechanisms are not mutually exclusive

Each view is preconfigured to use only one mechanis

If you want to use another mechanism, you create and

Page 157: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 157/1241

another view

Examples

 An employee’s position may be assigned to an accounot assigned to that employee’s organization

Employee sees the account in the My View

Employee does not see the account in the All View

Contacts have multiple access mechanisms: public (t

Page 158: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 158/1241

based), private (position- or employee-based), and m Employee sees public contacts in the My View

Employee sees private contacts in the My Personal Vie

Manager sees contacts for self and subordinates in the

View

Summary of Record Assignment

Standard Siebel business entities can be assigned to multiple employees, positions, or organizations

Multi-Valued

Access

Single-Valued

AccessAccess Method

Page 159: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 159/1241

 Accounts

Opportunities

Quotes

 Assets

Consumers

Forecasts

Organizations

 Accounts

Contacts

Opportunities

Forecasts

QuotesPositions

 Assets

 Activities

Service requests

Expense reports

Contacts

Employees

AccessAccess

Module Highlights

 Access to records may be restricted by employee, posorganization, or a combination thereof 

Which records are shown depends on the view selecte

visibility filter drop-down list

Multiple Access Control mechanisms may be in place

Page 160: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 160/1241

record For example, both position-based and organization-base

Control

Lab

In the lab you will: Explore record visibility in the application

 Add a position to a user an examine how it affects the

visibility filters

Page 161: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 161/1241

Page 162: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 162/1241

Module 7: Catalogs and Master Data

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 163: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 163/1241

Page 164: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 164/1241

Business Challenge

Companies have large amounts of data that must be: Classified, so that it is easy to organize, administer, na

search

Controlled, so that users only have access to appropria

Example: Companies want different sales divisions to

Page 165: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 165/1241

access to different product lists

Business Solution

Siebel applications provide mechanisms for: Organizing and classifying large amounts of static, refe

Organizing users into groups for appropriate access to

Page 166: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 166/1241

Master Data

Is static, referential data managed by administrators Products

Solutions

Literature

Resolution items

Page 167: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 167/1241

 Auction items Events

Decision issues

Competitors

Training courses

Has its visibility controlled by: Catalogs

Categories

 Access groups

Catalogs

 Are containers for hierarchies of categories Do not contain master data themselves

 Are created to contain a specific subset of the master

For example, customer documentation for credit card a

Page 168: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 168/1241

Category A Category B Category C 

Catalog A

• Product 4

• Product 5

Subcategory A

Subcategor

Subcategor

• Literature I

• Product 1

• Product 2

• Product 3

• Literature Item 1

• Product 2• Literature Item 2

• Product 3

• Product 6

Catalogs Continued

May be declared public or private Public catalogs are visible to all users

Categories within public catalogs may still be marked priv

Private catalogs have their visibility limited to privileged

known as access groups

Page 169: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 169/1241

For example, a credit card documentation catalog migpublic to allow users to see the service agreements a

However, a customer service documentation catalog

private to restrict visibility to those with service agreem

Catalog A (Public) Catalog B (Privat

 A public catalog is visible to all users;

individual categories within that

catalog may still be marked private

Categories within

catalogs are pr

Catalog Types

 Are assigned to catalogs Catalogs should have a catalog type

Seed catalog types include:

Infocenter 

Buying

Partner 

Page 170: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 170/1241

eService FAQ

Customer 

Multiselect Checkbox

Training

Partner Program

Training Curriculum

 Are used when querying for master data

Categories

 Are nodes in a catalog that contain: Master data

Other categories

 Are not shared between catalogs

However, multiple catalogs may contain categories wit

Page 171: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 171/1241

name May be declared public or private

If a category is declared private, all of its subcategories

private

Private categories also have their visibility limited to sp

access groups

Categories: Example

Even though Category B and Category C both containsubcategories named Subcategory A, these two subc

are distinct

Since Category B is private, its Subcategory A is also

Category B has been

Page 172: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 172/1241

Category A Category B Category C 

Catalog A

• Product 4

• Product 5

Subcategory A

Subcategor

Subcategor

• Literature I

• Product 1

• Product 2

• Product 3

• Literature Item 1

• Product 2

• Literature Item 2

• Product 3

• Product 6

marked as private

Access Groups

 Are collections of positions, organizations, user lists, ahouseholds used to access private catalogs and cate

Cannot contain individuals such as employees and us

To add an individual, create a user list with that individu

only member 

Page 173: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 173/1241

Create User Lists in the Administratio

 – Group > User Lists screen and add

them to access groups

Access Group Hierarchies

 Access groups can be organized into a hierarchy Child access groups inherit all of the access granted to

parents, hence have more privileges than their parents

Useful for giving more privileged users greater access

Page 174: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 174/1241

Parent access gro

Child access groups

Access Control

 Assign access groups to catalogs or categories Unlike customer data, individual records are not contro

 Access groups must be assigned to every catalog or c

which they need access

 Access is not inherited along the category hierarchy

C t l A A i A G X

Page 175: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 175/1241

Category A Category B Category C 

Catalog A

• Product 4

• Product 5

Subcategory A

Subcategor

Subcategor

• Literature I

• Product 1

• Product 2

• Product 3

• Literature Item 1

• Product 2

• Literature Item 2

• Product 3

• Product 6

 Assign Access Group Xto Category B

 Also assign Access

Group X to subcategory

 A if access is required

Access Control Continued

 An access group can only be added to a category if: The access group is also assigned to the category’s pa

The access group is a child of an access group assigne

parent

Catalog A Assign any access group to C

because its parent (Catalog A

Page 176: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 176/1241

Category A Category B Category C 

• Product 4

• Product 5

Subcategory A

Subcategor

Subcategor• Literature I

• Product 1

• Product 2

• Product 3

• Literature Item 1

• Product 2

• Literature Item 2

• Product 3

• Product 6

Cannot assign Access

Group Y to Subcategory

 A unless…

… Access Group Y is assigned to

Category B, or…

… Access Group Y is the child of

access group assigned to Categor

Access Control Continued

Removing a parent access group from a category alsoall child access groups from all subcategories

Example: Suppose Access Group Y is a child of Acce

Group X

Catalog A

Removing Access Group X

from Category B

Page 177: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 177/1241

Category A Category B Category C Catalog A

• Product 4

• Product 5

Subcategory A

Subcategor

Subcategor

• Literature I

• Product 1

• Product 2

• Product 3

• Literature Item 1

• Product 2• Literature Item 2

• Product 3

• Product 6

… removes Access Group Y from

Subcategory A

from Category B…

Page 178: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 178/1241

1. Create the Catalog

Navigate to Administration – Catalog > Catalogs Create a new catalog

Specify a name

Specify a catalog type

Specify other options

Page 179: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 179/1241

By default, the catalog is

active; mark it as inactive to

make it unavailable, for

example, during updates

Specify seque

to change the o

catalogs

2. Add Categories to the Catalog

Drill down on the catalog name in the Catalog view toto the Categories view

 Add categories to the catalog

Page 180: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 180/1241

Use buttons to

promote and

demote

subcategories

Drill down on a

catalog to see

its categories

3. Associate Master Data with Categories

Select the appropriate tab in the Categories view to adata to a category

Page 181: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 181/1241

For exa

select

Literature

add pro

literat

4. Declare Catalogs or Categories Private

Set the Private flag at the catalog or category level to data access

Subcategories are automatically marked as private

Page 182: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 182/1241

Marking t

category a

automatically

Premium an

Customers cbe marked

5. Create Access Groups

Navigate to Administration – Group > Access Groups Create the access group hierarchy as required

Create parents, then children

Specify parents for child records

Page 183: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 183/1241

Specify the parent access gro

creating the child access gro

requires creating the paren

5. Create Access Groups Continued

 Add positions, organizations, or user lists to access g

Page 184: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 184/1241

Click New to add parties

to an access group

Group type

Position, Orga

User List, or H

6. Assign Access Groups

 Assign access groups to catalogs or categories Use the Cascade button to automatically assign an acc

to all child categories

Page 185: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 185/1241

 Add access groups using

the Access Group tab under

Categories or Catalogs

Select an Access GroupCascade to assign that

group to all child cate

Access Control Summary

ViewsDetermined by

Responsibility 

Access ControlControls access to

Data

Customer Data

Page 186: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 186/1241

PositionsDetermined by

Position

Examples:

 Accounts

Opportunities

ContactsCampaigns

Master Data

• Is static, read-only material to

• Is created and maintained by

administrators

• Access is controlled at the Ca

Cate or level

Customer Data

• Is dynamic and transactional (can be updated)

• Is created and managed by users of the

application

• Access is controlled at the record level

Personal OwnershipDetermined by

UserID

Examples:

Service Requests

Product Defects

 Activities

OrganizationsDetermined by

Organization

Examples:

 Accounts

Opportunities

ContactsCampaigns

Page 187: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 187/1241

Lab

In the lab you will: Navigate catalogs, categories, and access groups

Restrict access to master data contained in categories

Page 188: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 188/1241

Module 8: The Siebel Web

Architecture

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 189: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 189/1241

Architecture

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to: Identify the pieces that make up the Siebel Web architec

Identify the role of each piece of the architecture

Describe how Siebel requests are processed

Why you need to know: P id f d ti f d t di th l ti hi

Page 190: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 190/1241

Why you need to know: Provides a foundation for understanding the relationship

the Siebel software components

Siebel Web Architecture Overview

 At a high level, the Siebel Web architecture consists o Siebel Web Clients that access and display the busines

 A Gateway Name Server that stores configuration infor

 A Web server that handles interactions with the Web C

distributes requests to the Siebel Servers

Servers that manage the business data and provide ba

interactive services for clients

Page 191: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 191/1241

 A relational database and file system that store busines

Siebel Web Client Web Server 

Sieb

Na

Database

Server 

Enterprise

Siebel File

System

Siebel Server(s)

Page 192: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 192/1241

Web Server 

Identifies and passes Siebel requests from Siebel Weto the Siebel Servers

Passes completed HTML application pages back to S

Clients

Provides load balancing for multi-server installations

Supports either built-in or third-party load balancing

Page 193: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 193/1241

pp p y g

Siebel Web Client Web Server 

Sieb

Na

Database

Server 

Enterprise

Siebel File

System

Siebel Server(s)

Siebel Gateway Name Server 

Is a Windows service or UNIX daemon process Stores component definitions and assignments, opera

parameters, and connectivity information

For example, connect strings to query servers for

server/component availability

Information stored in siebns.dat file on Gateway Name

Page 194: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 194/1241

Siebel Web Client Web Server 

Sieb

Na

Database

Server 

Enterprise

Siebel File

System

Siebel Server(s)

Siebel Enterprise

Is a logical collection of Siebel Servers that support usaccess a single database server and the Siebel file sy

Logically groups Siebel Servers for common administ

Siebel Server Manager

Supports sharing of common configuration informatio

Page 195: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 195/1241

Siebel Web Client Web Server 

Sieb

Na

Database

Server 

Enterprise

Siebel File

System

Siebel Server(s)

Siebel Servers

Execute tasks to manage the business data

Programs known as server components perform specif

or jobs for the server 

For example:

Importing and exporting data

Configuring the database to monitor for user-defined cond

Processing of client requests

Page 196: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 196/1241

Tasks may run interactively, in the background, or as b

Siebel Web Client Web Server 

Sieb

Na

Database

Server 

Enterprise

Siebel File

System

Siebel Server(s)

Examples of Server Components

The application object manager (OM) is a server com

that provides the environment in which Siebel user se

Users interact with an application-specific OM; for exam

Siebel Call Center Object Manager (SCCObjMgr)

Runs in interactive mode

The Workflow Monitor Agent periodically checks the s

determine whether workflows or assignments need to

Page 197: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 197/1241

Runs in background mode

Enterprise Integration Manager performs data imports

exports

Runs in batch mode

Siebel File System

Is one or more shared directories that store files used

applications

Files are compressed in a proprietary format to save sp

provide security

Examples: Product literature, sales tools, presentations

profiles

Page 198: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 198/1241

Siebel Web Client Web Server 

Sieb

Na

Database

Server 

Enterprise

Siebel File

System

Siebel Server(s)

Database Server 

Stores data used by Siebel applications in a predefine

database schema

Single database for Enterprise provides data consisten

Data is accessed by components through a data mana

Supports a variety of third-party relational database

management systems (RDBMS)

Page 199: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 199/1241

Siebel Web Client Web Server  

Sieb

Na

Database

Server 

Enterprise

Siebel File

System

Siebel Server(s)

Web Usage Login Scenario

Siebel Web Client (browser) sends the URL to the We

URL specifies:

Either HTTP or HTTPS protocol

Web server machine name

 Application and language

URL initially connects to a Siebel-specific virtual direc

Web server 

Page 200: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 200/1241

Virtual directories are created as part of the Siebel inst

1. Browser sends

URL to Web server 

Siebel Web Client

<browser >

Web Server 

<websrvr1>

Virtual Directory

[/callcenter_enu] 

http://websrvr1/callcenter_enu

2. Connects to the virtual directo

on the specified Web server 

Web Usage Login Scenario Continued

Virtual directory forwards request to the Siebel Web S

Extension (SWSE) installed on the Web server 

SWSE uses the eapps.cfg configuration file to obtain

parameters

Siebel Web Client

<browser >

3. Virtual directory

specifies to use SWSE

Page 201: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 201/1241

Web Server 

<websrvr1>

Virtual Directory

[/callcenter_enu] SWSE Eapps.cfg

4. SWSE locates the requestedsection in eapps.cfg

Web Usage Login Scenario Continued

Eapps.cfg specifies the location of the server, server c

broker port, Enterprise, and Object Manager informat

initial connection

For multi-server installations provides load balancing in

 Also provides generic login information for initial “anony

access to database

5. eapps.cfg specifiesconnect string values

Page 202: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 202/1241

Siebel Server <EMEJHG20>

Enterprise – <Siebel>

Web Server 

<websrvr>

Object Manager 

SCCObjMgr_enu

Web Usage Login Scenario Continued

Object Manager reads an application-specific configu

and component parameters, which specify the applica

location of the Siebel Repository File (SRF), and so fo

Siebel Repository File is a separate binary file that defi

more Siebel applications

Discussed in greater detail in subsequent modules

Most configuration information is specified by componeparameters rather than in the configuration file

Page 203: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 203/1241

parameters rather than in the configuration file

Siebel Server 

Enterprise <Siebel>

DatabaseServer 

Database

Server 

Object Manager 

SCCObjMgr_enu

CFG SRF

Siebel Gateway

Name Server 

6. Object Manager reads

CFG file on server and

component parameters from

Gateway Name Server 

Web Usage Login Scenario Continued

Object Manager retrieves data through data manager

The Siebel Web Engine (SWE), part of the Object Ma

reads a set of Web templates that are stored on the S

Server and creates HTML pages for the data requeste

Siebel Web Templates (SWT) are a set of template file

specify how to render the UI in the user’s browser 

HTML files with embedded Siebel tags defining content

E t i <Si b l>

Page 204: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 204/1241

Siebel Server 

Object Manager 

SWE

SWT

Databa

Serve

Databa

Serve

8. SW

Web T

and

HTM

Enterprise <Siebel>

CFG SRF

HTML login

page

7. OM retrieve

through data man

Web Usage Login Scenario Continued

Siebel Call Center 

The Object Manager sends the completed Web page

Web server, which passes it back to the Siebel Web C

Page 205: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 205/1241

Web Server 

<websrvr1>

Siebel Server <SS1>

Enterprise – <Siebel>

Object Manager 

SCCObjMgr_enu

HTML login

page

Physical Architecture

The Siebel Gateway Name Server, Siebel Server, daserver, and File System can be implemented on one

or spread across multiple machines

SWSE can be on that machine for development or test

environments

The Siebel Server(s) should have a high-speed LAN

connection to the database server H

Page 206: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 206/1241

Siebel Gateway

Name Server 

Enterprise Server 

FirewallFirewall

Web Server 

SWSE Siebel Server 

Siebel Server 

Module Highlights

 A Siebel Web Client displays the Siebel application in

Web browser 

 A Siebel Web Server is a third-party Web server with t

Web Server Extension (SWSE) installed and the Siebe

application virtual directories created

 A Siebel Gateway Name Server stores parameters and

connection information for Siebel Servers

Page 207: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 207/1241

 A Siebel Enterprise is a logical collection of Siebel Ser

 A Siebel Server is a set of processes that manage pro

all Siebel clients

Lab

In the lab you will:

Examine the virtual directories and eapps.cfg

Verify the information contained in the files against info

retrieved from the application

Page 208: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 208/1241

Module 9: Server Components and

Parameters

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 209: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 209/1241

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Define component groups

Define components

Describe parameters as inputs for components

Describe the various levels at which you can set param

how to set them

Describe named subsystems and job templates

Page 210: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 210/1241

Why you need to know:

Server behavior is controlled by components and param

hence an understanding of how to find and configure th

essential

Review: Siebel Web Architecture

The Siebel Web architecture consists of a Web Client

server, Gateway Name Server, and Enterprise contai

more Siebel Servers

Each Siebel Server includes its own set of components

that run on the server to provide application functionalit

Siebel Web Client Web Server

Page 211: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 211/1241

Siebel Web Client Web Server 

Sieb

Na

Database

Server 

Enterprise

Siebel File

System

Siebel Server(s)

Examining the Siebel Enterprise

View the Siebel Enterprise hierarchy using the Enterp

Explorer View of the Server Administration – Configur

screen

1 This Siebel 2 The first server listed

Page 212: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 212/1241

1. This Siebel

Enterprise is

named Siebel

2. The first server listed

in the enterprise is

OUsrvr 

3. OUsrvr has these

components available

Component Groups

 Are logical groupings of components

Components are enabled or disabled in groups

Support major functional areas of the application

For example, Siebel Call Center, Siebel Remote, or As

Management

Page 213: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 213/1241

The Enterprise Explorer lists the

available component groups

The detail pane provides addition

such as the number of component

Enabling and Assigning Component Groups

1. Enable the Component Group for the Enterprise

2. Assign the Component Group to the Server 

3. Enable the Component Group on the Server 

There are three steps to enable a component group o

Page 214: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 214/1241

1. Enable the Component Group for the Enterpris

Click the Enable or Disable buttons in the detail pane

Enterprise Explorer to enable or disable component g

By default, most component groups are enabled for the

Components within disabled component groups are no

on any of the servers in the enterprise

Best Practice: Disable component groups which will n

used on any server  Enabled component groups take a small amount of res

Page 215: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 215/1241

Enabled component groups take a small amount of res

the Siebel Gateway Name Server 

Click the appropriate button to

Disable a component group for t

2. Assign the Component Group to the Server 

In Administration – Server Configuration > Enterprise

the component group and server and click Assign

Stores component group information on the Siebel Gat

Server 

 Allocates memory for the component group on the Sieb

Name Server 

Page 216: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 216/1241

3. Click2. Select server 

1. Select component

group to assign

3. Enable the Component Group on the Server 

Once you have assigned a component group to a ser

or disable it on the server 

By default, assigning a component group automatically

Best practice: Assign and disable component groups

are not using now but may use in the future on that se

Select the desired server and click the Enable or Disa

Enabling allocates memory on the server for that comp

The component group is now available to the server

Page 217: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 217/1241

The component group is now available to the server 

Click Enable to enable component group on the s

Page 218: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 218/1241

Manage Individual Components

Specify startup behavior for individual components

 Auto Start: The component automatically starts up whe

Server service starts

Manual Start: The component must be started manuall

Prevents component from consuming memory or process

is needed

Page 219: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 219/1241

Click Manual Start under Ad

 – Server Configuration > Se

the component to manu

Executing Components

When a component executes, it is called a task

Multiple instances of the same component may run sim

Components execute in one of three modes:

Batch components run once until completion

Batch component executions are also called jobs

Usually initiated by user action, event, or workflow

For example, data loads or database extracts

Background components run continuously in the backg

Page 220: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 220/1241

g p y g

Periodically “wake up” and execute

For example, transaction processor for tracking changes

database

Interactive components run in response to client reques

For example, application object managers

Component Parameters

 Are input arguments for tasks

 Are set at one of five levels:

Enterprise parameters are

set throughout the enterprise

Server parameters are set at

the individual server level

Component Definitionparameters are specific to a

t b t t i

ComponentDefinition

parameters

Server

Component

parameters

Server

parameters

Page 221: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 221/1241

component, but enterprise-

wide

Server Component

parameters allow a server to

override a componentdefinition

Task parameters are for an

individual component when it

p

Enterprise

parameters

Not shown: Task

are set when sta

hence do not ap

Enterprise E

Hidden and Advanced Parameters

More advanced parameters are classified as hidden o

advanced

Click the appropriate button to see these parameters

Click the Reset button to return to the normal set of pa

Click Adv

Hidden to se

or hidden p

Page 222: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 222/1241

Component Definitions

 Are sets of parameters associated with a component

determine its behavior when it is run Set enterprise-wide, so that the component performs th

matter which server it is run on

Reconfigure definitions to modify component behavio

Duplicate definitions to create new component definiti

Creates a duplicate component with a new name and aset of input parameters

Page 223: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 223/1241

Modify pa

or dupl

definition t

new com

with differ

param

Parameter Inheritance

Parameters are set at any of five levels

Parameters set at any level are inherited at all lower lev

For example, parameters set at the enterprise level are i

the levels below it

Parameters set at any level override parameters set at

level

For example, parameters set when starting a task overrid

at higher levels

E t i

Page 224: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 224/1241

Server Server 

EnterpriseEnterprise

Component DefinitionComponent Definition

TaskTask

Server ComponentServer Component

Highest level

Lowest level

Removing Parameters

Do not attempt to delete parameters by setting their v

zero or null Causes zero or null value to be passed to component

Use Delete Parameter Override to remove parameter

a given level

Page 225: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 225/1241

Selec

Paramet

to remove

va

Profiles

 Are sets of parameters that may be used by multiple

components  Also referred to as “named subsystems”

 Are edited to modify behavior of multiple components

Page 226: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 226/1241

For example, the set of parameters used to send em

alerts to administrators is used by multiple componen

Modify the profile parameters

to change the behavior of all

components using this profile

Job Templates

Job templates are predefined sets of parameters for u

batch components Recall: When a batch component is executed it is calle

Multiple job templates can exist for the same compon

For example, weekly assignments versus daily assignm

Both assignment jobs run the same component; only the

parameters is different Unlike profiles, job templates are specific to a single c

Page 227: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 227/1241

For example, a job template containing

parameters for a weekly batch assignment job

This job template is

specific to the Assignment

Manager component

Page 228: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 228/1241

Module Highlights

Component Groups are logical groupings of server co

Enable component groups on the enterprise, assign tserver, and enable them on that server 

Set individual components to automatic or manual sta

Set component parameters at one of five levels: Ente

Server, Component Definition, Server Component, or

Parameter values are inherited from higher levels

Use Delete Parameter Override to restore inheritance

Page 229: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 229/1241

Profiles are sets of parameters used by multiple comp

 Also known as “named subsystems”

Job templates are sets of parameters used to execute

components

Lab

In the lab you will:

Use the Enterprise Explorer to examine component grocomponents, and parameters

Examine parameter inheritance

Enable a component group on a server 

Page 230: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 230/1241

1

Module 10: Server Management

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 231: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 231/1241

1

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Monitor the state of the enterprise, and individual servecomponents within that enterprise

Perform routine administrative tasks on the enterprise,

Managing components

Backing up and restoring the enterprise

Setting logging options Submitting jobs

Page 232: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 232/1241

Why you need to know:

These administrative tasks must frequently be perform

configuring and testing a deployment

Server Administration

Once components have been enabled and their param

have been defined, perform common administration ta Monitor the system

Change component parameters or component states, p

without shutting down the server 

Back up the system after making these changes

Submit batch jobs for processing Perform these tasks using the Administration – Serve

Management screen

Page 233: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 233/1241

Management screen

 A command-line interface is also available

Useful for using scripts to interact with the enterprise

Server Groups

 Add servers to a Server Group using the command-lin

change attribute groupname=<group name> for <server name>

Connect to all servers in the group simultaneously:srvrmgr /g <gateway> /e enterprise /z <group

/u <user> /p <password>

Performing groupwide manipulations such as changinparameters:change parameter NotifyHandler=newHandler

Page 234: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 234/1241

Changes the parameter for all servers in the server gro

 Adding a server to aserver group allows you

to manipulate all

servers in that group

simultaneously from the

command line interface

Monitor the Enterprise

Monitor the enterprise from the Administration – Serv

Management screen Provides status icons for servers, components, jobs, ta

sessions, and the enterprise

Ad i i t ti S

Page 235: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 235/1241

 Administration – Server

Management > Enterprises

shows the states of servers

and their components

within the enterprise

Monitor Sessions

Use the Session Monitor to monitor users logged in a

current activity Sessions are tasks running the associated Object Man

Navigate to Administration – Server Management > S

Page 236: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 236/1241

MWEST is currently logged in to

Call Center (SCCObjMgr_enu) and

is looking at the Account List Applet

Manage Component States

Manage components across the entire enterprise from

 Administration – Server Management > Components Manage components on a particular server from the

 Administration – Server Management > Servers scree

In either case, components may be paused, resumed

up, or shut down

Page 237: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 237/1241

Current

state in th

Component States

Running: The component is available and at least one

component task is currently running Online: The component is available but no componen

currently running

Unavailable: The component is unavailable and no co

tasks are running

Paused: The component is online but is not accepting Shutting Down: The server is shutting down; currently

tasks will execute to completion but no new tasks can

Page 238: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 238/1241

tasks will execute to completion, but no new tasks can

Shutdown: The server component is shut down

Change Component Parameters

Change component parameters by changing the Valu

on Restart Examine the Effective setting to see when the parame

change will become effective

Page 239: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 239/1241

Effective setting

indicates when

parameter change

will become effective

Reconfigure Component Definitions

Modifies component parameters without shutting dow

server(s) Useful during site migrations or application updates

Useful when changing multiple parameters and change

be performed at once

For example, when changing both a user name and a pas

parameter, changing one at a time would lead to authenti

During reconfiguration:

Tasks started before and during reconfiguration continu

Page 240: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 240/1241

with the old parameters

Tasks started after the reconfiguration is committed run

new parameters

Reconfigure Component Definitions

From the Administration –

Server Configuration >Enterprises screen

Start Reconfiguration:

Opens existing component

parameters for modification

Commit Reconfiguration: Commits the updated

Component Definition

Reconfigure Component Definitions Continued

Page 241: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 241/1241

p

 All tasks started after the

commit run with the new

parameters

Cancel Reconfiguration:

Cancels the current

reconfiguration; component

definition remains unaltered

Back Up the Enterprise

Recommended practice: Back up the enterprise a

making any configuration changes such as modifcomponent parameters

Creates a backup copy of siebns.dat

siebns.dat stores information about components, pa

and servers

May also be used for backup or migration purpose Do not try to manually duplicate this file

File is in se as long as Siebel Gate a Name Ser

Page 242: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 242/1241

File is in use as long as Siebel Gateway Name Serv

running

Restore the Enterprise

Restore a previous enterprise configuration with t

steps:1. Shut down the Siebel Gateway Name Server and

Server 

2. Replace the existing siebns.dat file with a working

3. Start the Siebel Gateway Name Server and the S

Server 

1. For Windows, right-click

Page 243: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 243/1241

2. Restore a backup o

to <siebeldir>\gtwysr

each service and select Stop

3. Right-click each

service and select Start

Server Event Logging

Monitor server events by setting their log levels

Navigate to Administration - Server Configuration > SServer Event Configuration

Set the log level for each Siebel Server event of interes

Select the Siebel Server for which

you want to log events

Page 244: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 244/1241

Select the event type you want to

log and enter a logging level from 0 to 5 in the Log L

Log Levels

There are six available logging levels for server event

0: Fatal 1: Errors

2: Warnings

3: Informational

4: Details

5: Diagnostic Higher log levels generate larger log files and may aff

performance, hence the recommended practice is to o

Page 245: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 245/1241

performance, hence the recommended practice is to o

these levels when troubleshooting

Component Event Logging

Use the Component Event Configuration view to set t

level of component event types

Select thecomponent for

which you want to

log events

Page 246: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 246/1241

Select the event

type you want tolog and enter a

logging level in the

Log Level field

log events

Examine Logs

Each task creates a log of its execution

Drill down on the

task number …

Page 247: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 247/1241

… to view the TaskInformation Log

Examine Log Files

View the log file on the Siebel Server  View the log file on the Siebel Server

1. Note the

task number 

2. Locate

the <Siebe

dir

Page 248: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 248/1241

3. Examine the file

System alerts collect information about the failure of t

unavailability of components, and send email alerts toadministrators

Examples:

 A component fails to restart

Critical system throughput thresholds are achieved

Create additional alerts to notify additional individualshandle different types of alerts

System Alerts

1. Select System Alerts

i E t i E l

Page 249: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 249/1241

2. Define new system alerts and ale

parameters to notify additional individ

or to handle different types of alerts

in Enterprise Explorer 

Using System Alerts

To configure a component to use these system alerts

Navigate to Administration – Server Configuration > SeComponents

Select the component of interest

Specify the notification handler for that component

One of the system alert profiles previously created

Page 250: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 250/1241

Notification

handler is a

parameter for

every component

that specifies

which system

alert to use

Submit Batch Jobs

Navigate to Administration – Server Management > J

Create a new job or copy an existing job Job templates as well as components are listed for new

Page 251: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 251/1241

Both job templates an

batch components ar

listed in the pick apple

Submit Batch Jobs Continued

Specify job parameters

Optionally, schedule the job to repeat at regular intervrun on a preferred server if it is available

Submit the job

Jobs can be set to rep

periodically or to hav

preferred server on whic

Submit the job once all

options have been set

Page 252: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 252/1241

Specific parameters

depend on the job youare submittingCreate and define

 job parameters

Manage Batch Jobs

Cancel, pause (hold), or resume jobs from the Admin

Server Management > Jobs screen

Monitor the progress of the job from the AdministratioManagement > Tasks screen

Canc

res

Page 253: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 253/1241

Batch job appears a

a task in the tasks lis

Module Highlights

Monitor the state of the enterprise, servers, compone

 jobs, and sessions from the Administration - ServerManagement screen

Change component parameters

May require reconfiguring component definitions

Back up the enterprise after changing configurations

Set logging options and system alerts to monitor the s Submit and monitor batch jobs

Page 254: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 254/1241

Page 255: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 255/1241

Page 256: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 256/1241

1

Module 11: Siebel Client Types

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 257: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 257/1241

1

Page 258: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 258/1241

Business Challenge

Not all Siebel application users have access to the W

times Some users spend a great deal of time traveling

Sales representatives

Executives

Instructors

Other users may want to access the application using

mobile phones or Personal Digital Assistants (PDAs)

Developers may need to access Siebel data when a S

Server or even the entire enterprise is down

Page 259: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 259/1241

Server or even the entire enterprise is down

Business Solution

Oracle provides five client types for use with the Sieb

application: Siebel Web Client

Siebel Wireless Web Client

Siebel Mobile Web Client

Siebel Handheld Client

Siebel Developer Web Client

Page 260: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 260/1241

Siebel Web Client Scenario

Wayne is an employee working from home, and connect

company’s network. He would like to frequently and quicand update the activities of his assigned accounts. Since

computer has a browser, but no Siebel software, he type

appropriate URL to access the account data.

Page 261: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 261/1241

Wayne is using the Siebel Web Client

Siebel Web Client

Is a “near zero footprint” client

Uses only a Web browser and a network connection For High Interactivity (HI) clients, includes ActiveX cont

truly zero-footprint in HI mode

 Accesses Siebel Servers through the Web Server run

Siebel Web Server Extension (SWSE)

 Accesses Siebel data through an Application Object M(OM)

Siebel Web Client Web Server 

Page 262: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 262/1241

Siebel G

Name Enterprise

Siebel File

System Siebel Server 

SWSEBrowser 

Object Manager Object Manager  CFG SR

Component

Database

Server 

Siebel Wireless Web Client Scenario

Wendy is a salesperson. She has a meeting set up with

opportunities. Since she is running late, Wendy uses herenabled phone to retrieve the meeting information from t

database. As an outcome of the meeting, she updates th

stage of the opportunity.

Page 263: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 263/1241

Wendy is using the Wireless Web Client

Siebel Wireless Web Client

 Allows users to read from, write to, and search the Sie

database through a wireless connection between a mdevice and the Siebel Web Server 

Requires a wireless gateway to translate HTTP data ge

Siebel Wireless to Wireless Application Protocol (WAP

Uses the same logical data model as the Siebel Web

Same business objects, business components, and so

Uses wireless-specific applets, screens, and views

Determined by the Wireless Object Manager 

Si b l Wi l W b W b SWi l

Page 264: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 264/1241

Siebel Wireless Web

Client

Web Server 

Sieb

NaEnterprise

Siebel File

System Siebel Server 

SWSE

Wireless Object Manager Wireless Object Manager  CFG SR

Compo

Database

Server 

Wireless

Gateway

Siebel Mobile Web Client Scenario

Mary is a consultant. She is at the airport waiting for her

would like to access contact information for an active opSince she cannot access the server, she is retrieving this

information from a local database on her laptop.

Page 265: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 265/1241

Mary is using the Mobile Web Client

Siebel Mobile Web Client

Is designed to provide full Siebel application functiona

requiring a network connection  A local executable providing full application functionalit

installed on the client

This local executable accesses local .cfg and .srf files,

its data in a local database and Siebel File System

Directly connects to a designated Siebel Server for

synchronization of data and files

Enterprise

Page 266: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 266/1241

Siebel Server 

Synchronization Manager 

Siebel File

System

Database

Server 

Mobile Client

Object Manager Object Manager 

C

Siebel Mobile Web Client Caveats

Many users mistake the Mobile Web Client for the We

 Application functionality is almost the same, so users fois which

To determine which application is running, check the

The Mobile and Developer Web Clients have a port nu

URL, and no application name

The Web Client usually does not have a port number in

and includes the application name

Mobile Web Client URL has a port

number and no application name

Web Client URL has no por

and includes the applicatio

Page 267: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 267/1241

Siebel Handheld Client

 Architecture is similar to the Siebel Mobile Web Client

The handheld client includes local database, file systemconfiguration files

The handheld client synchronizes with a specific Siebe

 Architecture is not identical to Siebel Mobile Web Clie

Only runs on Windows-based mobile devices

Supports a focused subset of application functionality

Screens, views, and applets customized for Siebel Handh

 Applications customized for Siebel Handheld

Enterprise

Page 268: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 268/1241

Siebel Server 

Synchronization Manager 

Handheld Client

Object Manager Object Manager C

Siebel Developer Web Client Scenario

Dana is a system administrator. She has the client softw

installed locally because she requires access to the app

even when the servers are not available.

Page 269: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 269/1241

Dana is using the Siebel Developer Web Clien

Siebel Developer Web Client

Is used by developers and system administrators for d

access to the Siebel database

Siebel servers do not have to be running

Does not require a Web server 

Is similar to the Siebel Mobile Web client in that:

 A local application must be installed on the client

Local configuration files must be stored on the client

However, can access any Siebel database and file sy

including a local one or the enterprise’sEnterprise

Page 270: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 270/1241

Siebel File

System

Database

Server 

Siebel Server 

Server Components

Dedicated Web Client

Object Manager Object Manager 

The Big Picture

The Siebel application supports a mixture of clients, d

on your users’ business requirements

Mobile/HDedicated Web Client

Siebel Wireless Web

ClientSiebel W

Bro

Wireless

Gateway

Web Server 

SWSE

Enterprise

Siebel Server 

Server Components

Page 271: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 271/1241

ObjeObjeObject Manager Object Manager Object Manager Object Manager 

Component Parameters

Server Components

Siebel File

System

Database

Server 

CFG

SRF

CFG SRF

Module Highlights

The Siebel Web Client accesses the Siebel Enterprise

Siebel Servers through a Web server running SWSE

The Siebel Wireless Web Client connects to a WAP-en

Web server, and is otherwise similar to the Siebel Web

The Siebel Mobile Web Client is a local executable tha

to a local database and provides full Siebel application

functionality

The Siebel Handheld Client is similar to the Siebel Mo

client, but runs on handheld devices

The Siebel Developer Web Client is used by develope

Page 272: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 272/1241

p y p

system administrators for direct access to the Siebel d

and for development and administrative changes

In-Class Discussion

Which client is best suited for:

Disconnected remote users needing access to their da

 A user with a cell phone needing access to his or her d

Users needing frequent and fast access to their data (e

scalable and maintained)

Server administrator needing access (to shut down a s

component)

Page 273: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 273/1241

Lab

In the lab you will:

 Answer questions about client types Use the Developer and Mobile Web Clients

Page 274: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 274/1241

1

Module 12: Securing Access to the

Application

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 275: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 275/1241

1

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Describe the types of user authentication supported by

applications

Explain the role of the security adapter 

Describe Single Sign On (SSO) security and how it diff

other authentication methods

Why you need to know:

You must understand the security mechanisms in orde

to implement them

Page 276: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 276/1241

Siebel Application Security

Siebel applications are secured at several levels:

Data visibility and view access should be restricted so

only the appropriate views and data

Subject of previous module

 Access to the application should be restricted to author

Subject of this module

Communication between architecture components may

secured Subject of subsequent module

Page 277: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 277/1241

Authentication

Is the process of validating a user’s identity

Verifies the identity of users before they gain access tapplication

Typically consists of collecting a set of user credentia

user ID and password and comparing them to pre-sto

Page 278: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 278/1241

Supported Authentication Methods

Siebel applications support authentication by either th

servers or the Web server:

Siebel security adapters are software programs that all

servers to authenticate users

Single Sign On (SSO) allows the Web server to authen

Siebel Web Server Extension performs authentication che

Security adapter is still involved in verifying the “trust toke

it by the Web server 

Page 279: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 279/1241

Siebel Security Adapters

 A security adapter is a piece of software that connects

authentication service

Implemented as part of the Application Object Manage

SWSE

Web

Server 

Browser 

1. User

provides

credentials

in browser 

2. Credentials are passed

through Web server to

 AOM. Web server does

not check the credentials

Page 280: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 280/1241

Credentials

Siebel Object

Manager 

Security

Adapter Authentication

Service

3. Security adapter authenticates

credentials using authentication ser

Authentication Services

Siebel applications support multiple authentication se

Database authentication

Lightweight Database Authentication Protocol (LDAP)

 Active Directory Services Interface (ADSI)

Custom authentication using the Siebel Security Adapt

Developer’s Kit (SSASDK)

Creating custom security adapters is beyond the scope o

Refer to the Siebel Security Adapter SDK in Bookshelf 

Siebel Object Security Authenticatio

Page 281: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 281/1241

Siebel Object

Manager 

Security

Adapter Authenticatio

Service

Credentials

Database Authentication

Users are authenticated against the

underlying database

The database Security Adapter is the

default for Siebel applications

Siebel Object Manager

SWSE

Web

Server 

Browser 

2. Password may be hashed to

prevent direct database accessHash passwo

Page 282: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 282/1241

Siebel

Database

Connect using DB3. Connect to database using user ID

and (possibly hashed) password.RDBMS performs authentication

Database Authentication Considerations

Does not require additional infrastructure components

directory servers

Uses a separate database login for each user 

Requires ongoing support from a database administrat

May support account policies based on those of the R

Password expiration

Password syntax

 Account lockout

Supports minimal user self-management

User cannot perform self-management without being g

di t t th d t b

Page 283: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 283/1241

direct access to the database server 

Directory Server Authentication

Users are authenticated

external directory service

The directory service con

user’s credentials and ad

information

 A single reserved databa

typically used for all userCredentials

Siebel Object

Manager 

SWSE

Web

Server 

Browser 

Security

Adapter 

AuLogin

Retrieve

1. User

provides

information

2. Verify

credentials

Page 284: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 284/1241

Connect using DB account

reserved DB

Account

3. Connect

to databaseSiebel

Database

Directory Service Considerations

Reduces administrative overhead

Eliminates maintenance of a separate database login f

 Allows Web users to self-register and maintain login inf

 Allows automated creation of users from User Adminis

 Allows external delegated administration of users

 Allows credentials store to be shared across multiple

applications

May support account policies based on those of the d

service

Password expiration

Password syntax

Page 285: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 285/1241

Password syntax

 Account lockout

Single Sign On

Web Server provides crthird-party service

Security Adapter looks uretrieves Siebel user IDaccount based on identiexternal source

Authenticated User IDand Trust Token

Siebel Object

Manager 

SWSE

Web Server 

Browser 

Security

Adapter 

ALogin

2. Verifie

credentia

User Credentials

1. User

providesinformation

3. Passes

authenticateduser ID and

trust token

Retrieves

Siebel user ID

4. Verifies

trust token

Page 286: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 286/1241

Connect Using DB Account

5. Connects

to databaseSiebel

Database

Siebel user ID

and DB

account

trust token

and collects

user ID

Single Sign On Considerations

 Allows users to access multiple applications without a

login

For example, Windows Integrated Authentication allow

access Siebel applications directly once they have logg

their Windows accounts

Uses credentials that are collected and verified by the

server 

Management of authentication can be performed from centralized location

Requires the use of a trust token

Secret value shared by the Web server and Object Ma

Page 287: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 287/1241

 Allows Siebel applications to be deployed into existing

sites and portals

Single Sign On Considerations Continued

Some Siebel User Administration features that are no

using SSO should be disabled for consistency, for exa

User self-registration

Delegated administration of users

Change password

Requires synchronization of users between the Siebe

application and the external authentication system

Page 288: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 288/1241

Comparing Authentication Methods

YesYesNo Allows using same

credentials across

NoYesNo Allows creation of

users from within the

Siebel application

NoYesNoSupports user self-

management

Depe

direc

Depends on

directory service

Depends on

RDBMS

Supports account

policies such as

password expiration

YesYesNoRequires additionalinfrastructure

SingleDirectory Service

 Authentication

Database

 Authentication

Page 289: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 289/1241

YesYesNo Allows external

management of

users

YesNoNo Allows single sign-on

multiple applications

Page 290: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 290/1241

Lab

In the lab you will:

Create a database account for a new user 

Page 291: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 291/1241

Page 292: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 292/1241

1

Module 13: Installing Siebel

Applications

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 293: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 293/1241

1

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Describe pre-installation steps necessary to prepare yo

environment for a Siebel installation

Install the Siebel application

Perform post-installation steps to verify your Siebel env

Describe how to use the multi-server update tool to aut

installations

Why you need to know:

Successful configuration of the Siebel environment req

successful installation

Page 294: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 294/1241

Business Challenge: Enterprise Installation

Installing enterprise-level software requires careful pla

preparation

Hardware and software prerequisites must be met

Multiple installers must be run in the correct sequence

Configuration parameters must be properly set before,

after installation

Installation may be required on many machines

Page 295: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 295/1241

Business Solution: Siebel Installation Tools

Siebel provides several tools to assist with the installa

Siebel environments:

Bookshelf documentation:

Deployment Planning Guide and System Requirements a

Platforms guide to prepare the system

Installation Guide [Windows or UNIX] to perform the insta

Step-by-step installers

Guide you through the installation process itself  Environment Verification Tool (EVT)

Performs verification tests on system at any time during t

to check:

Prerequisites

Page 296: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 296/1241

Configuration settings

Installations

Siebel Multi-Server Update Tool

Upgrades multiple server instances from a central admini

Performing a Successful Installation

Has three separate phases:

Pre-installation

Installation

Verification

Page 297: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 297/1241

Pre-Installation Tasks

Plan the System Topology

Verify System Requirements

Create Prerequisite Objects

Page 298: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 298/1241

Plan the System Topology

Identify where software will be installed

Which machine(s)

Consider hardware and networking requirements

What naming convention

What directory structure

Use the Deployment Planning Guide as an aid

Example:

Web Client

Enterprise Server 

C1

Siebel G

E1

Siebel Server(s)

S1 S2

Page 299: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 299/1241

C1, GS, S1, D1, W1Machine/Host Names/Addresses:

D1

C1

W1

Web Server 

Database

Server 

Page 300: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 300/1241

Verify System Requirements Continued

Optionally, run the Environment Verification Tool (EVT

prerequisites

Command-line tool for checking environment

Installed as part of the Siebel Server installation, so it m

copied from another installation to be run prior to serve

Run EVT with no flags to check

the pre-installation environment

Checks system software, net

settings, and recommended

tools, but does not verify RD

Page 301: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 301/1241

Create Prerequisite Objects

Create the Siebel database

Install the proper version of your chosen supported RD

software

Create an empty database/tablespace with appropriate

defined

Consult the platform-appropriate Siebel Installation Gu

recommended database configuration parameter settin

Create the Siebel file system Create the Siebel file system as a directory on a disk w

space

 Alternatively, partition the file system across multiple dire

servers

Page 302: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 302/1241

Must be accessible from machines running Siebel Serv

Must support long and case-sensitive file names

Create Prerequisite Objects Continued

Create a Siebel service owner account

Used to run Enterprise processes and components

Siebel Gateway Name service

Siebel Server service

Name must be consistent across all servers:

Siebel Gateway Name Server 

Siebel Servers

Server on which Siebel File System resides Recommended practice: On Windows use a domain ac

rather than separate accounts on each machine

Consult the platform-appropriate Siebel Installation G

exact steps and privileges

Page 303: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 303/1241

p p g

Installation Tasks

Create the Installation Image

Install the Enterprise

Configure the Server(s)

Install the Database

Install the Siebel Web Server Extensions

Page 304: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 304/1241

Install Additional Applications

Create the Installation Image

Run the Siebel Image Creator utility provided on your

generate an installation image

Refer to the Siebel Installation Guide for detailed steps

Page 305: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 305/1241

Page 306: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 306/1241

Run Siebel Enterprise Configuration Tool

Once installation completes, the enterprise configurat

runs automatically to set system parameters

 Alternatively, run <InstallDir>/gtwysrvr/bin/ssincfgw.exeat a later time

Create Gateway Name Server, Enterprise, and Siebe

Server Extension logical profile

Page 307: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 307/1241

Key Enterprise Configuration Parameters

To configure a new Gateway Name Server requires:

Gateway Name Server port, language for server messa

logs, and service account

To configure a new Enterprise requires:

 An existing Siebel Gateway Name Server 

 An Enterprise name, Siebel file system, database platfo

login information, and security type (database/LDAP/A

To configure a new Siebel Web Server Extension logirequires:

 An existing Siebel Gateway Name Server and Enterpri

 A directory in which to store the profile, network configu

parameters such as HTTP and HTTPS ports, High Inte

Page 308: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 308/1241

p p , g

Standard Interactivity default login names, and an Ente

security token

Page 309: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 309/1241

Key Server Configuration Parameters

Configuring a new Siebel Server requires:

 An existing Gateway Name Server and Enterprise

The Siebel Server name

Which component groups to enable on that server 

The language for server messages

The languages to deploy

Various port settings, including:

The connection broker port, used by the Siebel Web ServExtensions and other server components for communicat

The Siebel Remote Synchronization Manager port

The database connection port

Server clustering information

Page 310: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 310/1241

Install the Database

Run grantusr.sql in the dbsrvr/<RDBMS> directory on

database created during pre-installation

Manually run the database configuration utility and insdatabase

Creates appropriate schema and populates database w

data

Optionally, enter license key during database initializat

Page 311: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 311/1241

Install the Siebel Web Server Extensions

Use the SWSE installer to install the Siebel Web Serv

Extension on the machine hosting the Web server 

The Siebel Enterprise Server must already have been generate the Enterprise-specific SWSE profile

Specify parameters, including load-balancing strategy f

server installations and connection broker port

Specify load b

for multiple s

Siebel native

balancing (su

by the SWSE)

party load ba

Page 312: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 312/1241

party load ba

Page 313: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 313/1241

Verification Tasks

Check Installation Logs

Verify Services

Run EVT

Log In to Applications

Page 314: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 314/1241

Check Installation Logs

Every step of configuration generates a log file:

Siebel Gateway Name Server configuration log is

/gtwysrvr/log/sw_cfg_util.log Siebel Server configuration log is /siebsrvr/log/sw_cfg_

Siebel Web Server Extention configuration log is

/SWEApp/log/sw_cfg_util.log

Check these logs for severe or fatal errors

Informational messages are listed asGenericErrors with a severity level of 1

Page 315: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 315/1241

Page 316: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 316/1241

Run EVT

Use the Environment Verification Tool to check the st

your enterprise

Tool reads evt.ini file to determine what checks to perfo Tool supports checking Siebel Gateway Name Server,

Server, Siebel Web Server Extension, third-party Web

third-party database

Output can be text, text file, HTML, or HTML file

For complete details on using the EVT, see your platfoInstallation Guide

Page 317: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 317/1241

EVT Example

The following example runs the EVT with the default o

outputs the results to output.htmlThe –o flag specifies

the output file format

The o

coded

Page 318: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 318/1241

Log In to Applications

Log in to the Siebel application to confirm connectivity

Web server and Siebel server 

Web server address  Application SWE command appended to

the URL by the application’s

default Web page

Page 319: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 319/1241

Browser Health Check

Is a utility that runs on the browser to verify that it is pconfigured for High Interactivity

Runs when the Web client is invoked if it is enabled in section of siebel.cfg

Checks the client environment on which the Siebel aprunning

Internet options

Java setting

Environment/registry settings Performs checks using

values set in the applicationconfiguration file

Each check can haveone of the following values

Set values in

[clientHealthC

section of tconfiguration

Page 320: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 320/1241

one of the following values

Required

Recommended

Ignore

Multi-Server Updates

The Siebel Update Server provides a single administr

for patching and updating multiple Siebel servers

 Allows quick monitoring of each server’s current patch Supports both push and pull models of software upda

 Administrator can send updates out to all servers (push

Servers can periodically query the update server for up

Siebel Update Server

provides a centralized

administration point for

managing updates on

Siebel servers

Page 321: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 321/1241

Siebel servers

Siebel Update Server 

Is a Web-based installation tool based on Macrovision

Installshield

Uses a Tomcat/JSP Web server on the Update Server  Includes a local database on the Update Server for sto

product information across an enterprise

Currently supports server updates and patches

Gateway Name Server, Siebel Enterprise, Siebel Serve

Web Server Extension, and so forth

Page 322: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 322/1241

Siebel Update Server Architecture

 A single update server provides a central access poin

multiple clients

Siebel Update Server software is installed on server  Siebel Update Client software is installed on each clien

Clients have other Siebel software installed, such as Sieb

Siebel Web Server Extension

Siebel Update Server

Clients are Siebel

Servers or Siebel

Web Servers

in

Page 323: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 323/1241

Siebel Update Server 

Siebel Update Clients

W

Page 324: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 324/1241

Siebel Update Server Functionality Continued

 Administrator may select client machines and schedu

for them (push method)

Clients may check for updates and download them whconvenient (pull method)

 Administrator may

choose which clients

to updateClient may

manually check

for updates (pull)

Page 325: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 325/1241

 Administrator may

push updates to

clients

Page 326: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 326/1241

Page 327: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 327/1241

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Describe the major types of object definitions

Describe the relationships between them

Why you need to know:

Enables you to explore an existing application effective

Provides the foundation you need to configure the obje

definitions that form the basis of an application

Page 328: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 328/1241

The Siebel Application Architecture

Recall that the Siebel Application consists of:

 An execution engine that provides the application beha

The Siebel Server(s); more specifically, their components Configuration files and the Siebel Gateway Name Serv

specify operating parameters for the execution engine

Most configuration parameters are stored in the Gateway

 A relational database that stores user data

 A set of physical User Interface (UI) files that specify ho

the UI in the user’s

 A Siebel Repository File (SRF) containing compiled ob

definitions

Page 329: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 329/1241

The Siebel Application Architecture Continued

Object definitions are created, modified, and stored in

tables in the database and compiled to the SRF

.cfg

UI files

Siebel Application

Specifies

parameters to

Generates

Supplies compiledobject definitions to

User Interface

Serves

data to

Shape the UI viaObject

Manager 

No object

definitions here

• Siebel template files

• Cascading style sheets

• Image files

Object definitions

compiled to here

Page 330: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 330/1241

Database

Server 

.cfg

Configuration

File

Objectdefinitions

stored here

UI laye

definitio

Busines

definiOpportunity

 Account

Product Contact

Account

Siebel Repository File (SRF)

Contains compiled object definitions that specify:

Presentation of data

Business logic Physical table storage

Page 331: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 331/1241

Data la

definitio

Object Definitions

Provide the foundation for application execution

 Are grouped in three layers with different purposes

Refer to definitions in the next lower layer 

Screen

BusinessComponent

BusinessObject

ViewApplet

Field

List Column

or Control

UI

Layer 

Business

Layer 1

Re

Siebel Application Architecture

Page 332: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 332/1241

TableColumnDataLayer 

Data Layer 

Data layer object definitions specify the logical structu

physical database

Definitions are metadata, not data In the Data layer, there are two principal data object d

Table definitions

Column definitions

ORDER_NUM

S_ORDER

DISCNT_PERCENT STATUS

Columns

Table

Page 333: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 333/1241

Business Layer 

Business object definitions specify the business logic

application

In the Business layer, there are two principal objects: Business component

Business object

Business

object

Business

Page 334: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 334/1241

component

Business Component (BC)

Represents one fundamental business entity in the en

For example: Service Request, Contact, Activity

Represents a logical grouping of data from one or mo Refers to a base table

Consists of multiple fields that characterize the busine

component

Many fields within the business component reference c

the base table

Order Number Discount Stat

Order Entry - OrdersBusiness

component

Page 335: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 335/1241

ORDER_NUM

S_ORDER

DISCNT_PERCENT STATUS

Basetable

Page 336: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 336/1241

Business Object (BO)

Is a collection of related Business components (BCs)

Represents a major functional area of the enterprise

For example, order management Contains specific details about the relationships betw

One BC is the master or driving BC

Organizes related business components

Action

Order Entry

- Orders

Quote Payments

Order Entry

Business

Object

(BO)

Business

Parent BC pr

focus for

Page 337: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 337/1241

yComponent

(BC)

Comparing Business Components and Business

Business Objects provide focus to views and organize

Business Components provide data to applets and co

manipulation in tables

Business

Component

Business

Object

Applet

Field

Control data

Business Component Business Ob

Business

Component

Provide data Provide focus

Page 338: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 338/1241

Table

manipulation Details

relationships

between BCs

UI Object Definitions

There are five principal UI objects within the user inte

3. View

1.

 Application

2. Screen

Page 339: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 339/1241

Control and List Column Object Definitions

Provide the ability to display and manipulate data

T

disp

c

Page 340: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 340/1241

Applet Object Definition

 A section of a view, such as a list or form

References one business component whose data can

viewed and edited through the list or form Consists of list column or textbox control object defini

Refer to fields in the applet-referenced business compo

Specify how the data for the fields is displayed in the lis

Page 341: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 341/1241

Order Number Account Oppo

Business

component

Order Entry - Orders

View Object Definition

Specifies a view in a Siebel application

Contains multiple applet object definitions

Order Entry

- Orders

Action Quote Payments

Order Entry

View references

one BO

 Applet references

one BCBO

Order Entry – My Orders View (Sa

Vie

Page 342: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 342/1241

BC

Screen Object Definition

Specifies a screen in a Siebel application

Is associated with a major functional area of the enterp

Contains multiple view object definitions that usually rsame business object

 Administration screens are an exception

Screens

Same screenViews in

that screen

Page 343: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 343/1241

Application Object Definition

Specifies a particular collection of screens available in

application

 Application

Page 344: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 344/1241

Configuring Siebel Applications

Is accomplished by using:

 An HTML editor to modify template and other physical

Siebel Tools to modify object definitions

Physical UI Files

UI Object Definitions

Business Object Definitions

D t Obj t D fi iti

Configurable Layers

Use an HT

modify

Use Siebel

object

Page 345: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 345/1241

Data Object Definitions

Page 346: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 346/1241

Lab

In the lab you will:

Examine how UI layer object definitions reference busi

object definitions

Page 347: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 347/1241

Page 348: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 348/1241

1

Module 15: Using Siebel Tools to

Examine Object Definitions

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 349: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 349/1241

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Describe the differences between object types and obje

Use Siebel Tools to examine parent and child object de

Why you need to know:

Enables you to configure Siebel applications effectively

Enables you to examine mappings that support bulk da

Page 350: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 350/1241

Siebel Tools

Is an Integrated Development Environment (IDE)

Is a declarative configuration tool

Is used to create and modify object definitions (metadadefine Siebel applications

Set properties for objects that control behavior 

No need to modify source code or write SQL

Configure

objects instead

of writing code

Page 351: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 351/1241

Object Definitions

 Are metadata that define elements of the user int

business logic, and data storage

 Are stored in the Siebel Repository, a subset of tathe Siebel database

 Are examined, created, and edited using Siebel T

 Are compiled into the repository file for a configur

application

Object

Manager 

Configured

application

Tools output is inpu

for object manage

Page 352: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 352/1241

Repository

DataRep

Object Definition

Consists of a set of properties with assigned values

Is created from a template called an object type

View

Name:

Title:

Inactive:

View

Name: Account List View

Title: My Accounts

Inactive: FALSE

Template

with empty

properties

Object with

values in

properties

Object Type Object Definition

Page 353: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 353/1241

properties properties

Examining Object Definitions

Use the Object List Editor (OBLE) to display object de

Select an object type in the Object Explorer (OE)

Object definitions appear in the Object List Editor

OEObject

property

Page 354: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 354/1241

Siebel Tools User Interface

Differs from the client application

Has toolbar icons for common user operations

Record navigation Query Sort

Menu invoked by

right-clicking

object definition

Page 355: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 355/1241

Properties Window

Displays the properties for the object definition selecte

OBLE

Select View > Windows > Properties Window

Properties are listed in alphabetical order 

The value is shown next to property name

Propertieswindow

Does not show Changed

Same value

OBLE

Page 356: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 356/1241

Does not show Changed

or Project properties

Hierarchy of Object Types

Some object types contain child object types

For instance, Field is a child object type of the Busines

Component object type

Multiple

hierarchy

levels

Object

explorer

displays

hierarchy

Page 357: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 357/1241

Object Explorer 

Displays by default a small set of the most commonly

object types

Select View > Options and click the Object Explorer tab

remove object types from the Object Explorer 

Some options

displayed

 All options

displayed

Page 358: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 358/1241

Viewing Parent/Child Object Definitions

Select object types and definitions alternately to exam

object definitions

2. Select the parendefinition in the O1. Expand the parent objecttype (BC) in the OEUse theTypes tab

Page 359: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 359/1241

3. Select the desired child

object type (Field) in the OE4. View child object definitions f

parent definition in the lower pa

Additional Navigation Techniques

Back and Forward Buttons

Bookmarks

Hyperlinks

Page 360: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 360/1241

Hyperlinks

Drill down on a hyperlink to navigate to that object def

For example, applet to business component

For example, business component to table

Underline

in blue

Page 361: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 361/1241

Back and Forward Buttons

Use the Back button to return to the object definition l

examined

Use the Forward button to return to the current object

Page 362: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 362/1241

Bookmarks

Use bookmarks to navigate directly to a specific objec

Select desired bookmarkfrom bookmarks window

 Add a new

bookmark

Page 363: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 363/1241

from bookmarks window

Window Navigation

Use dockable windows and tabs for frequently-access

such as the Properties window

Undock windows to resize and place

 Autohide docking

windows

m

Window t

 Autohide

Page 364: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 364/1241

Object Explorer: Flat Tab

Removes all hierarchy and shows all object types in a

Helps developers:

Find a child object with an unknown parent

See how object definitions and properties are typically

Parent object definition

displayed (parent applet for the c

Select any

object type

in the OE

Page 365: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 365/1241

Module Highlights

Siebel Tools is a declarative configuration tool

Object definitions consist of a set of properties with as

values

 Are created from a template called an object type

The Object Explorer (OE) lists object types

Object definitions appear in the Object List Editor (OB

Properties Window displays the object definition selec

OBLE Flat tab removes all hierarchy and shows all object ty

single list

Page 366: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 366/1241

Tools navigation convention used in the labs

Select Business Component :: Account | Field :: Account Role

Lab

In the lab you will:

Use Siebel Tools to examine object definitions in the S

repository

Parent Object

Type in OE

Child Object

Type in OE

Parent Record

in OBLE

Child Record

in OBLE

Page 367: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 367/1241

Page 368: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 368/1241

1

Module 16: The Siebel Data Model

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 369: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 369/1241

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Describe the purpose of the Siebel Data Model

Describe the role of primary and foreign keys, indexes,

keys

Identify prominent tables in the Siebel Data Model

Why you need to know:

Enables you to understand how data is accessed in ex

applications

Enables you to understand how to map your business

Siebel Data Model

Enables you to configure the Data layer as necessary f

implementation

Page 370: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 370/1241

The Siebel Data Model

Defines how the data used by Siebel applications is s

standard third-party relational database

Specifies the tables and relationships

Is designed to support the data requirements across S

applications

Business

Component

B

O

Table

Field

ColumnDefines data storage

organization (makes up

the data model)

Defines business logic

Page 371: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 371/1241

Siebel Data

Is organized and stored in normalized tables in a relat

database

Each table has multiple columns storing atomic data (s

cannot be logically further sub-divided)

The data schema is organized to eliminate repeated st

data

S_PROD_INTR

 OW  _I   D

N

AME 

P ART   _N UM

 U

 OM  _ C D

Table

Columns (store

single values only)

Page 372: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 372/1241

Primary Key (PK)

Is a column that uniquely identifies each row in a table

ROW_ID serves as the primary key for Siebel tables

Primary key

S_PROD_INTR OW  _I   D

NAME 

P ART   _N

 UM

 U OM  _ C D

Page 373: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 373/1241

ROW_ID

Is a column in every table

Contains a Siebel application-generated identifier that

across all tables and mobile users

Is managed by Siebel applications and must not be musers

Is viewed by right-clicking the record or

navigating to Help > About Record

Page 374: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 374/1241

Understanding the Data Model

Columns

User Keys

Indexes

Tables

Relationships Between Tables

Extension Tables

Page 375: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 375/1241

Tables

 Approximately 3,000 tables in the database

Three major types: Data, Interface, and Repository

EIM_PROD_INTR OW  _I   D

NAME 

P ART   _N

 UM

 U OM  _ C D

S_TABLER OW  _I   D

NAME 

DE  S  C   _T 

E X T 

Interface Rep

S_PROD_INTR OW  _I   D

NAME 

P ART   _N

 UM

 U OM  _ C D

Data

This module is

focused on data

tables

Page 376: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 376/1241

Data Tables

Store the user data

Business data

 Administrative data

Seed data

 Are populated and updated by:

Users through the Siebel applications

Server processes such as: Enterprise Integration Mana

and Assignment Manager

Have names prefixed with S_

 Are documented in the Siebel Data Model Reference

Page 377: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 377/1241

Seven Prominent Data Tables

Store data for the major business entities

S_SRV_REQR OW  _I   D

 S R  _N UM

DE  S  C   _T E X T 

L A S T   _ UP D

A S  GN  _DT 

S_OPTYR OW  _I   D

NAME 

BD GT   _AMT 

 S T  G  _NAME 

P R O G  _NAME 

S_CONTACR OW  _I   D

L A S T   _NAME 

F  S T   _NAME 

S_R OW  _I   D

S_EVT_ACTR OW  _I   D

A C T I   V I   T Y   _

 UI   D

T  OD O  _ C D

 OP T Y   _I   D

P R O J   _I   D

S_ORG_EXTR OW  _I   D

DE  S  C   _T E X 

DE P T   _N UM

E MP   _ C  O U

NT 

DI   V I    S I    ON

S_ASSETR OW  _I   D

NAME 

A S  S E T   _N U

M

MF  G  _DT 

 S E RI   AL   _N

 UM

Opportunity Service Request Conta

Asset Account Activity In

Page 378: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 378/1241

Columns

Each table has multiple columns to store user and sys

Defined by Column child object definitions

Columns determine the data that can be stored in tha

Page 379: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 379/1241

Column Properties

Determine size and type of data that can be stored in

Limit proposed modifications to a standard application

Do not edit existing properties

I

t

Page 380: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 380/1241

Data Type and Length Properties

Physical Type identifies the type of data to be stored

Length determines the maximum size

Page 381: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 381/1241

System Columns

Exist for all tables to store system data

 Are maintained by Siebel applications and tasks

System columns

Page 382: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 382/1241

User Keys

 Are used to determine the uniqueness of records whe

entering, importing, or integrating data

 Are predefined and cannot be changed

 All columns

may not b

Column Combination

provides a unique value

Page 383: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 383/1241

yp q

Indexes

 Are a separate data structure that stores a data value

column and a pointer to the corresponding row

Used to retrieve and sort data rapidly

 Are predefined by Siebel as a set of standard indexes

 

Sequence affects sort order

 _

Page 384: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 384/1241

Sequence affects sort order 

Relationships Between Tables

Siebel tables have many predefined relationships to s

as-delivered application

1:M – one-to-many

M:M – many-to-many

S_ASSETR O

W  _I   D

NAME 

A S SET  _N UM

S_PROD_LNR O

W  _I   D

NAME 

DE  S  C   _T E X T 

1:M relationshipM:M relationship

S_PROD_INTR O

W  _I   D

NA

ME 

P ART   _N UM

 OR

DE R  _ C  S T 

 AsProduct Line

P R OD  _ C D

Page 385: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 385/1241

1:M Relationships

 Are captured using foreign key (FK) table columns in

on the many side of the relationship

FK column on many side of the relationship reference

column on one side

PK FK

S_ASSETR OW  _I   D

NAME 

A S  S E T   _N UM

 S E RI   AL   _N UM

P R OD  _I   D

Foreign key column for

1:M

Product : Asset

relationship

S_PROD_INTR OW  _I   D

NAME 

P ART   _N UM

 ORDE R  _ C  S T 

P R OD  _ C D

Page 386: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 386/1241

Foreign Key Table Columns

 Are columns in a table that refer to the primary key co

related (parent) table

Many are named with suffix _ID

 Are maintained by Siebel applications and tasks to enreferential integrity and should never be updated direc

SQL

Foreign key

Foreign key column

Page 387: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 387/1241

Finding Foreign Keys for 1:M Relationships

Inspect the Foreign Key Table property in a Column o

definition to determine the column that serves as the

PK FK

S_ASSETR

 OW  _I   D

N

AME 

A

 S  S E T   _N UM

 S 

E RI   AL   _N UM

R OD  _I   D

S_PROD_INTR

 OW  _I   D

N

AME 

ART   _N UM

 O

RDE R  _ C  S T 

R OD  _ C D

FK

column

Page 388: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 388/1241

M:M Relationships

 Are captured using foreign key columns in a third tabl

the intersection table

S_PROD_LN_PRODR OW  _I   D

P R OD  _L N  _I   D

P R OD  _I   D

S_PROD_LNR OW  _I   D

NAME 

DE  S  C   _T E X T 

S_PROD_INR OW  _I   D

NAME 

P ART   _N UM

 

Product : Product Line

intersection table

PK

FKFK

PK

Page 389: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 389/1241

1:1 Extension Table

Is a special table that has a 1:1 relationship with a bas

Foreign key for the relationship:

Is located in the extension table

Is named PAR_ROW_ID

Provides additional columns for business components

referencing the base table

 A base and extension table can be considered as a sin

table

S_PROD_INTR OW  _I   D

NAME 

P ART   _N UM

 U OM  _ C D

S_PROD_INT_XR OW  _I   D

P AR  _R OW  _I   D

AT T RI   B  _ 3  9 

PK FK

Base Table Extension Table

Page 390: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 390/1241

Standard 1:1 Extension Tables

Prebuilt for many major tables

Have the name of the base table with suffix _X

Contain 40-plus generic columns of varying types

Store data for new business component fields that are to those mapped to the base table

Page 391: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 391/1241

1:M Extension Table

Is a special table for storing child data related to an ex

parent table

 Allows you to track entities that do not exist in the as-

Siebel applications

S_ASSET_XMR OW  _

I   D

P AR  _R OW  _I   D

T Y P E 

NAME 

 

PK FK

S_ASSETR OW  _

I   D

NAME 

A S  S E T   _N UM

 S E RI   A

L   _N UM

P R OD

  _I   D

Page 392: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 392/1241

Standard 1:M Extension Tables

 Are prebuilt for many tables

Have the name of the main table appended with _XM

TYPE defines data

classification

PAR_ROW_ID stores FK toROW_ID in main table

NAME stores name of child

entity

 ATTRIBs are predefined with

varying types

Page 393: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 393/1241

Module Highlights

Siebel Data Model defines how data is stored in a thir

relational database

 A primary key (PK) is a column that uniquely identifies

table row ROW_ID is a column in every table

Contains a Siebel application-generated unique identifi

User keys specify the columns used to determine uniq

records when entering, importing, or integrating data

Foreign Key Table columns are columns in a table thathe PK column of a related table

1:1, 1:M, and M:M relationships are predefined within

Page 394: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 394/1241

Lab

In the lab you will:

Examine tables, columns, indexes, and user keys that

Siebel Data Model

Determine the form of relationships between tables in tData Model

Page 395: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 395/1241

Page 396: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 396/1241

1

Module 17: Siebel Business

Components

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 397: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 397/1241

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Define a business component

Describe how business component fields at the busine

layer are mapped to columns at the data layer  Describe how base and joined tables are used as a pa

mapping

Why you need to know:

The business component is a fundamental object in the Application Architecture

Page 398: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 398/1241

Application Architecture: Business Components

Provide a way to group data according to business lo

 Are referenced by applets

Specify access to tables (read, write, and update)

 Are used by business objects to provide data to views

TableColumn

Screen

Business

Component

Business

Object

ViewApplet

Field

List Column

or Control

UI

Layer 

Business

Layer 

DataLayer 

Siebel Application Architecture

1

Re

B i C t

Page 399: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 399/1241

Business Component

 A business component (BC) is a person, place, th

event about which data must be stored

Represents a fundamental business entity 

Provides the foundation for controlling how data i

selected, inserted, and updated in underlying tab

Opportunity

Product Contact

Opportunity

Quote

= Business Component

B i C t

Page 400: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 400/1241

Business Component Continued

 Arranges data from one or more tables into a logical g

Consists primarily of fields and joins

Each field references a single column in a table

Is not a table Does not store data

Stores metadata: data about data

Opportunity

Name Sales Stage Sales StageDecision Level

S_OPTYR OW  _I   D

NAME 

DE  S  C   _T E X T 

 C  UR C Y   _ C D

S_STGR OW  _I   D

NAME 

P HA S E   _ C D

 ST G  _ ORDER

S_OPTY_XR OW  _I   D

P AR  _R OW  _I   D

AT T RI   B  _ 0 1 

AT T RI   B  _ 0  9 

AT T RI   B  _ 3  9 

Description

Base Table Joined Tables

BC

B i C t R

Page 401: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 401/1241

Business Component Reuse

 A business component can be:

Defined once in terms of a logical collection of columns

or more tables

Then used in many different business object contexts

Opportunity

Product Contact

Opportunity

Quote

Contact

Product A

Contact

Contact BC appears as

child in Opportunity BO

Contact BC ap

master in Con

Quote

B T bl

Page 402: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 402/1241

Base Table

Contains the main columns for the business compone

Every business component references only one base

Many BC fields are mapped to base table columns

Fields referencing base tables are editable in the UI

S_OPTYR OW  _I   D

NAME 

DE  S  C   _T E X T 

 C  UR C Y   _ C D

Base table

Column:

DESC_TEXT

Field:

Description

Mapping E

Opportunity

Name Sales Stage Sales StDescription Decision Level

Business Component Table Property

Page 403: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 403/1241

Business Component Table Property

Each business component contains a table property t

specifies the base table

Base

table

Fields That Map to a Base Table

Page 404: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 404/1241

Fields That Map to a Base Table

Column property maps to a column in the base table

Join property is blank

Join is blank

“Status” field

references base table

Base table

Explicit Join

Page 405: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 405/1241

Explicit Join

Is a join that brings in data from tables other than the

to meet the business component’s data display requir

Most fields referencing explicitly joined tables are read-

applet Includes a join definition and a join specification

BC field references the join definition

S_OPTYR OW  _I   D

NAME 

DE  S  C   _T E X T 

 C  UR C Y   _ C 

D

S_STGR OW  _I   D

NAME 

P HA S E   _ C 

D

 S T  G  _ ORD

E R

Opportunity

Base table Join

Name Sales StageDescription

Fields That Map to a Joined Table

Page 406: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 406/1241

Fields That Map to a Joined Table

Join property specifies the join object definition being

Column property maps to a column in the joined table

coSales Stage field maps to

Sales Stage join

Name of join that

maps to S_STG table

Joining Data from Joined Tables

Page 407: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 407/1241

Joining Data from Joined Tables

Returns only one row from the joined table

There is a 1:1 or 1:M relationship from the joined table

Relationship is established using a FK column on the

to join to the PK column on the joined table

S_OPTYR OW  _I   D

NAME 

DE  S  C   _T E X T 

 C  UR C Y   _ C D

S_STGR OW  _I   D

NAME 

P HA S E   _ C D

 S T  G  _ ORDE R

 C  URR  _ S T  G  _I   D

FK column on base tablePK column o

 joined table

Base Table Joined Table

FK PK

Displaying Fields from Joined Tables

Page 408: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 408/1241

Displaying Fields from Joined Tables

The UI layer specifies how information joined at the b

layer will be displayed

From Base Table From Joined Table

S_STGS_OPTY

Opportunity

BC

Opportunity

List Applet

Data Layer 

Business

Layer 

UI Layer 

Join Definition

Page 409: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 409/1241

Join Definition

Specifies the joined table from which to retrieve data

Is a child object of the business component

Defaults the alias property to the name of the joined ta

Modify alias when there is more than one join to same

 Alias of join

Join Specification

Page 410: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 410/1241

Join Specification

Specifies how to retrieve the related row from the join

Based on the foreign and primary keys used to relate th

 joined tables

S_OPTYR OW  _I   D

NAME 

DE  S  C   _T E X T 

 C  UR C Y   _ C D

S_STGR OW  _I   D

NAME 

P HA S E   _ C D

 S T  G  _ ORDE R

 C  URR  _ S T  G  _

I   D

Opportunity

Name Sales Stage IdDescription

FK PK

Foreign

Key

field

Page 411: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 411/1241

Fields That Map to an Extension Table

Page 412: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 412/1241

Fields That Map to an Extension Table

Join property specifies the extension table being refer

Column property references a column in the extensio

Field is editable in the UI

T

The Budget Amt

field references

the S_OPTY_Xtable

Module Highlights

Page 413: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 413/1241

Module Highlights

 A BC is a person, place, thing, or event about which d

stored

 A BC can be defined once then re-used by different B

Each BC references a single base table  A BC can include data from joined tables

 A join definition specifies joined table

 A join specification specifies how to access joined tab

PK/FK

 An extension table extends data in the BC

Fields on extension tables use implicit joins

Page 414: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 414/1241

1

Module 18: Siebel Party Business

Components

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Module Objectives

Page 415: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 415/1241

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Define a party business component

Describe the role of S_PARTY and its extension tables

party business component data Describe how data is stored differently for non-party bu

components and party business components

Describe how implicit and explicit joins are used with p

business components

Why you need to know:

Party business components are a fundamental elemen

application architecture

Business Challenge: Modeling Party Data

Page 416: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 416/1241

Business Challenge: Modeling Party Data

Party data is the ubiquitous information found in most

Some prominent party types include Contacts, Employ

Positions, Accounts, User Lists, Organizations, and Ac

Party types are often related to each other  Employees are related to positions

Positions are related to accounts

 Access groups are related to organizations

and so forth

Relationships may be dynamic or ad hoc  A contractor becomes an intern, then an employee

 An access group is required for participants of the Janu

Big Release Roll-Out Event

Page 417: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 417/1241

Business Solution: Party Business Component

Page 418: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 418/1241

y p

Provides a way to create a network of relationships be

party types to reflect changes and complexities in the

environment

Infuses flexibility into the data model Can establish and change relationships between variou

types, as needed

Em

Position

Organization

Account

Access Group

Us

Party business

component

Party Business Components

Page 419: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 419/1241

y p

 Are similar to standard business components; they:

Group data according to business logic

 Are referenced by applets

Specify access to tables Have fields that map to columns

Name

NAME PARTY_TYPE_CD

Account

S_PARTY

Party Type Code Fields

Columns

Party

business

component

Base table

Differences Between Party and Non-Party BCs

Page 420: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 420/1241

y y

In standard BCs, most data is stored in the base table

In party BCs, data is stored in extension tables

S_PARTY acts solely as a linking mechanism betwee

S_OPTYR OW

  _I   D

NAM

DE  S 

 C   _T E X T 

 C  UR

 C Y   _ C D

Base Table

Standard BC:

Opportunity

BD G

T   _AMT 

Party BC: Account

S_PARTYR OW

  _I   D

NAM

Base Table

P AR

T Y   _T Y P E   _ C D

S_ORG_R OW

  _I   D

NAM

Extensi

  

  _

Standard BCs Party BCs

Relationshipdata stored here

Recostore

Record datastored here

S_PARTY and Its Extension Tables

Page 421: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 421/1241

_

Eight prominent S_PARTY extension tables store the

S_PARTY

Person

S_EMP_PER

S_USER

S_CONTACT

S_BU

S_ORG_EXT Organi

related

S_POSTN

S_PARTY_GROUP

S_USERLISTAccess

related

Base Table Extension Tables

Commonly Used Party Business Components

Page 422: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 422/1241

y y p

Represent a variety of entities that can be arranged in

related to persons, organizations, or access control

Contact

Employee

User 

Account Position

Division

Organization User List

Access Group

Commonly Used Party Business Components

Person-

Related

Access

Control

Organization-

Related

Person-Related Party Business Components

Page 423: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 423/1241

y

Store their main data in S_CONTACT

May store additional data in S_USER and S_EMP_PE

Serve as logical extension tables

S_USERR OW  _I   D

S_CONTACTR OW  _I   D

L A S T   _NAME 

F  S T   _NAME 

E MAI   L   _ADDR

Logical extension

table to store user-

specific data

Stores majority

of person-

related data

S_R OW  _I  D

Logic

to s

L  O GI   N

P A S  S W ORD

P AR  _R OW  _I   D

PK FK

P AR  _R OW  _I   D

S_PARTYR OW  _I   D

FK

Person-Related Party Business Components Conti

Page 424: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 424/1241

Primarily reference person-related S_PARTY extensio

JonesChris3Person3

SmithSally2Person2

DoeJohn1Person1

PAR_ROW_LAST_NAMEFST_NAMEPAR_ROW_IDPARTY_TYPE_CDROW_ID

S_USERS_CONTACTS_PARTY

 A person. . . . . .has contact-

related details. . .

.

S_USERS_CONTACTS_PARTY

Party Type Code Last Name Login Name

Party Business Component (BC): User 

Person-Related Party Business Components Conti

Page 425: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 425/1241

 A number of person-related business components us

tables

CJONES3JonesChris3

SSMITH2SmithSally2

DoeJohn1

LOGINPAR_ROW_IDLAST_NAMEFST_NAMEPAR_ROW_ID

S_USERS_CONTACT

PAR_ROW

S_EMP

First Name Last Name

Party BC: Contact

Last Name Login Name

Party BC: Employee

John is not a useror employee

Sally iemp

Organization-Related Party Business Componen

Page 426: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 426/1241

Store their main data in S_ORG_EXT

May store additional data in S_BU

May include account, division, organization, or house

S_BUR OW  _I   D

S_ORG_EXTR OW  _I   D

NAME 

L  O C 

E MP   _ C  O UNT 

Logical

table to

organiz

P RT NR  _F L  G

HI    S T   _ S L  S   _V  OL 

I   NT   _ OR G  _F L  G

=‘Y’ for ABC

Company

internal division

PK FK

S_PARTYR OW  _I   D

PAR  _R OW  _I  D

P AR  _R OW  _I   D

FK

Organization-Related Party Business Componen

Page 427: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 427/1241

Multiple organization-related business components us

tables

 ABC Cust3N ABC Customer3

 ABC Company

 ABC Company –

Sales Division

NAME

2

1

PAR_ROW_ID

 ABC Com2N

HQY

NAMEPAR_ROW_IDLOCINT_ORG_FLAG

S_BU

Name Internal Org Flag Orga

OrganizationName Location

Account

Sales is not an

organization

S_ORG_EXT

Groupings for Access Control

Page 428: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 428/1241

Represent groupings of party instances

User List

 Access Group

Position

R OW  _I   

D

R OW  _I   D

R OW  _I   D

PK FK

S_PARTYR OW  _I   D

FK

P AR  _R

 OW  _I   D

NAME 

P AR  _R

 OW  _I   D

NAME 

S_PARTY_GROUP S_S_USERLIST

Groupings for Access Control Continued

Page 429: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 429/1241

Position3

 Access Group2

Consultants User List1User List1

NAMEPAR_ROW_IDPARTY_TYPE_CDROW_ID

S_USERLISTS_PARTY

2

PAR_ROW_I

S_PARTY

Name

User List

Na

Access Gr

 Access Group, User List, and Position are party busincomponents

If a user list,

populateS_USERLIST

If an acce

popS_PARTY

Business

component

Example, Relating Party Data

Page 430: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 430/1241

 A user list can be associated with persons via the S_P

intersection table S_PARTY_PER

There are relationships in S_PARTY

They are represented in S_PARTY_PER

ROW_ID in S_PARTY is used to relate party types

002003

001003

PERSON_IDPARTY_ID

Smith,Person001

Smith,Person002

ABC UsUser List003

NAMPARTY_TYPE_CDROW_ID

S_PARTY_PER S_PARTY

Page 431: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 431/1241

Party Implicit Joins

Page 432: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 432/1241

Used to populate the prominent S_PARTY extension

Created automatically for these extension tables

 Are similar to implicit joins for standard business com

Do not appear in join object definitions ROW_ID in base table is always the PK

PAR_ROW_ID in extension is always the FK

JonesChris3Person3

SmithSally2Person2

DoeJohn1Person1

PAR_ROW_LAST_NAMEFST_NAMEPAR_ROW_IDPARTY_TYPE_CDROW_ID

S_USERS_CONTACTS_PARTY

FKPK FK

Base Table Extension Table Exte

Page 433: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 433/1241

Explicit Join Definition

Page 434: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 434/1241

References the extension table that contains data of i

R OW

  _I   D

NAM

DE  S  C   _T E X T 

 C  UR C Y   _ C D

R OW

  _I   D

NAM

L  O C 

Opportunity

S_PARTY

extension

table

P AR  _R OW  _I   D

S_ORG_EXTP R  _D

E P T   _ O U  _I   D

S_OPTY

Name AccountDescription

FK

References

PAR_ROW_ID

Explicit Join: Another Party Business Componen

Page 435: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 435/1241

Uses an explicit join to the party table, and not the im

Example: Bringing parent account data into the Accoun

component for display in an Account applet

Account

Name Parent Account Name Parent Account LoLocation

Explicit Join Definition

Page 436: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 436/1241

Select or create an explicit join to the desired S_PART

extension table

Use a join specification to specify the relationship

The Account party

business component…

…has multipleexplicit self-joins

to S_ORG_EXT

Select the one t

the relationshi

Module Highlights

Page 437: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 437/1241

Party types have dynamic or ad hoc relationships

Party BCs create relationships between party types

Party BCs are similar to standard BCs but data is stor

extension tables Eight prominent S_PARTY extension tables store dat

Person-related party BCs store data in S_CONTACT

Organization-related party BCs store data in S_ORG_

 Access Group, User List, and Position are party BCs

Party implicit joins populate S_PARTY extension table Explicit joins reference extension tables that contain d

Lab

Page 438: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 438/1241

In the lab you will:

Examine how fields in a (non-party) business compone

columns in base and joined tables

Examine how fields in a party business component ma

columns in S_PARTY, its extension tables, and joined

Page 439: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 439/1241

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 440: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 440/1241

1

Module 19: Siebel Business Objects

Module Objectives

Aft l ti thi d l h ld b bl t

Page 441: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 441/1241

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Describe how business objects focus data presented in

based on context

Describe how views reference business objects

Describe how links are used to relate parent business c

to child business components

Why you need to know:

Business objects enable you to configure your compan

business logic

Application Architecture: Business Objects (BO)

Pro ide a a to organi e BCs into major areas acco

Page 442: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 442/1241

Provide a way to organize BCs into major areas acco

your business logic requirements

Provide context to views

TableColumn

Screen

Business

Component

Business

Object

ViewApplet

Field

List Column

or Control

UI

Layer 

BusinessLayer 

Data

Layer 

Siebel Application Architecture

1

R

Business Challenge

Business components provide a way to group data ac

Page 443: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 443/1241

Business components provide a way to group data ac

business logic, but they do not address the need for c

For example, the opportunity BC defines how to retriev

opportunity data, but not related activity data

How is it tha

view shows

related to t

oppo

?

Business Solution: Business Objects Provide Fo

Business objects contain relationships used to access

Page 444: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 444/1241

Business objects contain relationships used to access

from a child business component

Identifies records to display depending on context in w

are viewed

Ensures that only records related to parent BCs are retqueries

 Activities pertai

Kaboom opportun

only Kaboom, are

Business Objects

Are a collection of related business components that

Page 445: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 445/1241

 Are a collection of related business components that

a major area of the business

Contain parent and child business components

Relate parent and child components via links

Links focus records displayed based on the context in w

are viewed

Provide a container for grouping business component

Provide context for views

Action

Opportunity

Product Source

Opportunity

Parent BC provides

most data; data is

specific to the BO

Ch

provid

t

Link focuses data in

view

Business

Object

Business Object Component

Contains Link and BusComp properties that relate the

Page 446: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 446/1241

Contains Link and BusComp properties that relate the

and child business components to each other 

Parent BCChild BC

Link Definition

Identifies the PK/FK relationship

Page 447: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 447/1241

Identifies the PK/FK relationship

Identifies which records to retrieve from the child busin

component

Identifies the foreign keys to populate when new child r

created

Is used with both 1:M and M:M relationships between

and child data

Action

Opportunity

Product

Opportunity

Link Definition

1:M Link

Used for 1:M relationship

Page 448: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 448/1241

Used for 1:M relationship

between parent and

child business components

Link DefinitionD

M:M Link

Used for M:M relationship between parent and child b

Page 449: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 449/1241

Used for M:M relationship between parent and child b

components

Uses an intersection table to resolve the link

Intersectio

with FK c

Cascade Delete Property

The Cascade Delete property of a link specifies wheth

Page 450: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 450/1241

The Cascade Delete property of a link specifies wheth

records of a 1:M relationship are deleted when the pa

is deleted

None: Neither deletes nor clears the foreign key colum

Clear: Does not delete, but clears the foreign key colum

Delete: If a parent record is deleted, all child records ar

Cascade Delete Property Continued

Determined by your business logic

Page 451: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 451/1241

Determined by your business logic

Should all activities be deleted if parent contact is delet

Should all child opportunities be deleted if the parent a

deleted?

Deletion

cascades

Grandchild Business Components

Business objects may include grandchild business co

Page 452: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 452/1241

j y g

Used in parent-child-grandchild views

 Activity plans

for Art.net

 Activities for

selected Art.net

activity plan

Links for Grandchild Data

Specify how the grandchild and child business compo

Page 453: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 453/1241

p y g p

related

Used to retrieve grandchild records on parent-child-gra

views

Child/Grandchild

Pare

Module Highlights

Business objects

Page 454: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 454/1241

j

Provide a way to group BCs according to business logi

Provide context to views

Contain parent and child BCs associated via links

Links provide a way to focus records based on contex

Links relate parent and child BCs

Link definitions specify which records to retrieve from

 A 1:M link is used for a 1:M relationship between pare

child BCs

 A M:M link is used for a M:M relationship between pa

child BCs

 A M:M link uses an intersection table to resolve the link

BOs may include grandchild BCs

Page 455: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 455/1241

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 456: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 456/1241

2

Module 20: Configuration Strategy

Page 457: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 457/1241

Configuring a Siebel Application Configuring is the process of using Siebel Tools to mo

Page 458: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 458/1241

as-delivered Siebel application to meet business need

Object definitions are edited and created

Developers do not modify code in siebel.exe

Developers do not write SQL directly

Repository

Data

Object

Manager 

Siebel Applications Siebel as-delivered applications include a predefined

Page 459: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 459/1241

screens, views, lists, forms, and their associated temp

 A pred

Tailoring the Logical User Interface Developers tailor the as-delivered Siebel screens, vie

Page 460: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 460/1241

and forms to better support users’ business needs

 A tailor

Tailoring the Physical User Interface Use the existing physical UI files whenever possible

Page 461: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 461/1241

When necessary, copy existing files and modify as ne

Use an HTML or

a text editor tomodify layout

Database

Server 

.cfg

UI files

Configuration File

ObjectManager 

•Siebel template files

•Cascading style sheets

•Image files

Use a text editor

to modify colors,

fonts, etc.

Use a graphics

program to add

your

organization’s

images

Siebel Business Entities Siebel as-delivered applications utilize a set of Siebel

t th t i l t th d fi d b i l i

Page 462: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 462/1241

components that implement the defined business logi

Account

Product

Service Request ActContact

Tailoring the Business Logic

Developers also tailor the application by modifying the

d fi iti f th b i t t i l t

Page 463: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 463/1241

definitions of the business components to implement

business logic appropriate to the users’ organization

Modify form of

the relationship

 Add fields

Modify p

of existi

Account

Product

Service Request ActContact

Page 464: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 464/1241

Configuration Strategy

Make minimal changes to the as-delivered application

U i ti bj t d fi iti i th d li d

Page 465: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 465/1241

Use existing object definitions in the as-delivered repo

whenever possible

Ensures that a new configuration can be upgraded

with minimal effort

Modify definitions as required, rather than creating ne

Creating new object definitions can lead to redundant c

and increase the maintenance effort

Configuration Strategy Continued

Do not delete, make inactive, or rename seemingly un

object definitions

Page 466: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 466/1241

object definitions

Other object definitions might reference them

Deleting does not save memory, storage space, or imp

performance Use existing template files

Modify only when changes are essential

Modifying a template for one view or applet can have u

consequences if another view or applet uses the same

Configuration Strategy Continued

Plan your configuration project from the top down

First determine UI and application f nctionalit

Page 467: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 467/1241

First, determine UI and application functionality

Then, determine what changes are necessary at the B

layer to implement UI functionality

Finally, determine what changes are necessary at the Dimplement Business layer changes

Keep changes to a minimum

Determine UI Functionality

Determine Required

Business Layer Changes

Determine Required Data

Layer Changes

Configuration Strategy Continued

Make changes from the bottom up

First edit Data layer definitions if necessary

Page 468: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 468/1241

First, edit Data layer definitions, if necessary

Then, edit Business layer definitions, as required

Finally, edit or create the templates and UI layer definit

display the data correctly

Edit or Create UI Layer

Templates and Definitions

Edit Business LayerDefinitions, as Required

Edit Data Layer

Definitions, if Necessary

Create a Separate Development Environment

To isolate the development effort from the enterprise’s

production database set up a development environm

Page 469: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 469/1241

production database, set up a development environm

Each developer or group can work on a different aspe

development effort

Use Siebel-supplied mechanisms to separate the deveeffort into projects

Test all customization and extensions thoroughly befo

deploying to end users

Server Machine DeveloperWorkstation

DeveloperWorkstation

DevelopWorkstat

Develop on the Local Repository

 Always make changes to the object definitions in the

repository

Page 470: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 470/1241

repository

Cannot undo or back out changes when made directly

server 

Changes made directly on the server are immediately aother developers

Incomplete changes on the server cause problems

Use Siebel-supplied mechanisms to copy definitions b

server and local databases

Server Machine

Server

repository

Local

repository

Developer

Workstation

Module Highlights

Configuring is the process of using Siebel Tools to mo

as-delivered Siebel application

Page 471: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 471/1241

as delivered Siebel application

Recommended configuration strategy:

Tailor existing logical UI, physical UI, and business ent

minimize development and support effort Do not delete, make inactive or rename unused object

Use existing template files

Plan configuration project from the top down, make ch

from the bottom up

Development and production environments are separ Enables developer or group to work independently

Enables developer to test customizations before deploy

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 472: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 472/1241

2

Module 21: The ConfigurationProcess

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Describe the development environment architecture

Page 473: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 473/1241

Describe the development environment architecture

Set up the development environment

Why you need to know: Being able to set up the development environment is c

carrying out a successful configuration

The Development Environment

Siebel Remote is used to establish a local developme

environment

Page 474: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 474/1241

Siebel Developer Web Client provides full Siebel appl

functionality in a local environment

 Accesses a local DB containing a subset of the server Synchronizes with the server database, as necessary

Implements a development and testing environment fo

developers

Siebel Server 

Synchronization Manager 

Enterprise

Siebel File

System

Developer Web Clien

Object Manager Object Manager 

Local

Database

Server 

Database

Local

SFS

Server 

SRF

Server CFG

Procedure for Setting Up the Development Envir

1. Enable the Development Environment

Page 475: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 475/1241

2. Create the Developer 

3. Create a User Login

4. Generate the Local Database Template

5. Extract User Data

6. Modify and Verify Configuration Settings

7. Initialize Local Database

8. Extract Repository Data

Enable the Development Environment

Enable the Siebel Remote component group to enabl

development using a local database

Page 476: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 476/1241

p g

 After enabling a component group, do not forget to rest

Siebel Server and synchronize components

Enable

Rem

Create the Developer 

 Add the developer as an employee

Associate a position and responsibility

Page 477: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 477/1241

 Associate a position and responsibility

Register the developer as a mobile client

 Add ere

Register mobile

client

Create a User Login

If necessary, create a corresponding database login u

RDBMS tools and the grantusr.sql script as a templat

Page 478: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 478/1241

Example:

Screen shot from Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Express copyright © Microsof

Generate the Local Database Template

Run the Generate New Database server task to gene

database template

Page 479: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 479/1241

Snapshot of the current version of the database schem

columns, indexes, and so forth)

Extract User Data

Run the Database Extract server task to extract user

Generates compressed data files

Page 480: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 480/1241

Stored on the server 

User data is extracted for the user(s) specified in the jo

parameters

Data is extracted to the specifiedmobile user’s directory

Modify Configuration Settings

Modify configuration information for Siebel Tools in

..\tools\BIN\<Language Code>\tools.cfg

Page 481: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 481/1241

For example, ..\tools\BIN\ENU\tools.cfg

Modify configuration information for Siebel Developer

Client in ..\client\BIN\<Language Code>\<application> For example, ..\client\BIN\ENU\uagent.cfg for the Siebe

Center Developer Web client

Both configuration files hold critical information to ens

behavior of local executables:

Native client connection information for the local databa

ODBC connection for the server 

ODBC connection for the local database

Location of the local Siebel file system

Example Configuration Settings

Example: tools.cfg (edited for length)

Page 482: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 482/1241

Overall configuration:

SRF file, application n

directory, and ODBC c

to local and server datatesting connecti

 Available data sources. Add more if needed

Local connection in

including native conne

absolute path. Mod

database is in a diffeServer connection

information

Verify Web Client ODBC Connections

Ensure that the Web Client ODBC connection referen

local database

Page 483: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 483/1241

The database file parameter of SEAW Local Db defaul

must match ConnectString in [Local] section of uagent.

ConnectString must point to local DB: \client\LOCAL\ss

Web Client

connection. . .

. . .must

match

Must poin

Verify Tools ODBC Connections

Ensure that the Tools ODBC connection references th

The database file parameter of SSD Local Db default in

t t h C tSt i i [L l] ti f t l f

Page 484: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 484/1241

must match ConnectString in [Local] section of tools.cf

Tools

connection

. . .

. . .must

match

Test Tools ODBC Login

Check user IDs and passwords, and then test the con

Page 485: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 485/1241

1. Check

2. Test

Page 486: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 486/1241

Extract Repository Data

Perform a Get to extract repository data

Copies all objects from the server repository to the loca

Page 487: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 487/1241

Must be performed before compiling

SRF must be based on the full set of Siebel objects

“Get” all pr

extract rep

data

The Big Picture

Steps to create a usable local database

Server 

Page 488: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 488/1241

Template

provides

schema

Server

Database

Repository

Data

Compressed

files provide

user data

Server database

provides

repository data

1. Generate DB template

4. Extract

repository data

2. Extract

user data

Additional Developers

For each additional developer:

1. Create the developer 

2 C t l i

Page 489: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 489/1241

2. Create a user login

3. Extract the local database

4. Initialize the local database5. Verify login and data sources

Server Machine

Server Local Local

Developer

Workstation

Developer

Workstation

Develop

Worksta

Module Highlights

Siebel Remote is used to establish a local developme

environment

An individual developer uses Siebel Developer Web C

Page 490: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 490/1241

 An individual developer uses Siebel Developer Web C

develop and test custom configurations

Create the development environment by: Installing Siebel Tools on the client

Enabling Siebel Remote on the server 

Creating a developer, login, and remote user on the se

Generating, extracting, and initializing a local database

Verifying login and data sources

Lab

In the lab you will:

Set up an employee as a developer 

Extract a local database for the developer

Page 491: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 491/1241

Extract a local database for the developer 

Populate the developer’s local database with user and

data

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 492: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 492/1241

2

Module 22: Managing ObjectDefinitions

Page 493: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 493/1241

Projects

 Are named sets of object definitions in a repository

Only one version of a project exists in a repository at a

Are a mechanism to organize object definitions so tha

Page 494: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 494/1241

 Are a mechanism to organize object definitions so tha

developer can exclusively work on them as a group

Accounts Screen

Account (SSE)

Screen

Applets

Views

Account List Applet

Account Entry Applet

Manager’s Account List Vie

Account Profile View

Account List View

All Account List View

Object definitio

property = Acc

x s ng an ew ro ec s

The as-delivered Siebel application contains a large n

existing projects

New projects are created by:

Page 495: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 495/1241

New projects are created by:

Selecting the Project object type, and

Creating a new record in the Object List Editor 

Assigning Object Definitions to Projects

Every object definition must belong to one, and only o

Either a Siebel-supplied project, or 

A user-created project

Page 496: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 496/1241

 A user created project

 A top-level object definition has a Project property

Child object definitions belong to the parent’s project

Child belo

project. It d

projec

Viewing Object Definitions by Project

View object definitions in a project using the Project d

list

Displays object types for which there are object definiti

Page 497: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 497/1241

Displays object types for which there are object definiti

selected project

Select **All Projects** at the top of list to see all project

1. Select

project

2. Selectobject

type

Repositories

Master copy of repository resides on server database

Stores tested object definitions for entire development

Each developer has repository copy on local develope

Page 498: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 498/1241

Each developer has repository copy on local develope

workstation

Developers perform all editing on their local repository

Server Machine Developer

Workstation

Developer

Workstation

Develop

Workstat

Server  Local

Copying Projects

Check In and Check Out safely manage concurrent u

multiple developers

Object definitions in one or more projects can be copi

Page 499: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 499/1241

Object definitions in one or more projects can be copi

From the server to the local developer repository (Use

Check Out to retrieve definitions)

From the local developer repository to the server (Chec

Overwrites the version in the destination repository

Server  Local

Project1. Developer

uses Get,

Check Out

3. Developer

uses Check In

2. De

mo

ob

Getting Projects

Get populates a local database with a copy of project

server repository

Use Get to bring object definitions modified by other d

Page 500: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 500/1241

g j y

to your local database

Use Get with All Projects selected to populate a newlylocal database

Check Out

Click Check Out to copy projects from the server repo

the local repository

The project’s Allow Object Locking property must be di

Page 501: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 501/1241

Check Out Continued

Use Check Out in order to edit object definitions in a p

Copies all object definitions in project on server to loca

Local copy of project is overwritten by server version

Page 502: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 502/1241

Locks project on server repository

Prevents other developers from modifying that project

Locks the project in the local repository

Permits developer to make changes to object definitions i

Pencil indicates

“writable”

Check Out Objects

 Allows for checking out individual objects

Quicker than checking out entire projects

To enable object-level Check Out

Page 503: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 503/1241

j

Enable object-level Check Out in the [Siebel] section of

Ensure ToolsConstrain parameters = TRUE  Add EnableObjectCOCI=TRUE

Log in to Tools as SADMIN to the server database and

project’s Allow Object Locking property

2. Lo

to se

Allow

1. Enable object-

level Check Out in

tools.cfg

Canceling Check Out

Discards changes made to checked-out project if:

Changes are no longer required

Local project has become corrupted

Page 504: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 504/1241

To cancel a Check Out of a project:

Check out the project from the server again Replaces modified object definitions in local repository wi

version from server repository

Repeating Check Out is permitted for person who last che

project

Then check in the project to unlock the project on both

and server repositories

Undo Check Out

Use Undo Check Out to release lock on a project on t

without checking in edited object definitions

Makes the original project available to another develop

Page 505: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 505/1241

Can be followed by Get to restore original definitions in

 Alternate way to cancel

Check Out

Undo Check Out:

Releases lock on server 

Retains lock on local

database

Developer can continue tomodify object definitions but

will not be able to check

them in to the server 

Cannot publish

definitions

Check In

Is used when object definitions in the project have be

and tested

Copies object definitions from local repository to server

Page 506: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 506/1241

Replaces versions of checked out object definitions wit

versions and unlocks projects

Can also check in object definitions in newly created proje

Releases locks on both server and local copies of proje

Maintain Lock leaves project locked for further local modi

current developer 

Check In Continued

Click Check In to copy projects and objects from the l

repository to the server repository

Page 507: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 507/1241

Locking Projects

You can directly lock and unlock projects in the curren

repository (local or server)

Click to

Page 508: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 508/1241

Or Select Tools > Lock Project

Click to

propert

Locking Projects Locally

 Allows developer to make and test modifications loca

Prevents developer from checking changes into serve

repository

Page 509: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 509/1241

However, locking does not prevent other developers fro

out and modifying a project

Consider when:

Prototyping your ideas without preventing other develo

checking out the project

Intending to discard (rather than save) your work

Server Machine DeveloperWorkstation DeveloperWorkstation DevelopWorkstat

Server  Local

Do Not Lock Projects on the Server 

Oracle recommends that developers never directly loc

on the server

Prevents the developer from undoing changes and rest

original definitions

Page 510: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 510/1241

original definitions

 Allows other developers to get object definitions in an i

inconsistent, and untested state

 Always use Check Out and modify the object definitio

Server Machine Developer

Workstation

Developer

Workstation

Develop

Workstat

Server 

Local

Module Highlights

Projects organize object definitions so a developer ca

them exclusively

The as-delivered application contains many projects

Page 511: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 511/1241

Every object definition must belong to one, and only o

Developer edits a copy of master repository residing oclient

Check Out and Check In are used to modify object de

Project locking ensures only one developer can modify

object

Lab

In the lab you will:

Explore how projects work in Siebel Tools

Check out a project from the server 

Page 512: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 512/1241

Page 513: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 513/1241

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 514: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 514/1241

2

Module 23: Editing and CompilingObject Definitions

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Create new and edit existing object definitions

Validate edited object definitions

Archive object definitions and projects

Page 515: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 515/1241

 Archive object definitions and projects

Back up the local database

Compile object definitions into a repository file

Why you need to know:

These are fundamental activities that occur during all c

efforts

Use the Object Explorer and Object List Editor to edit

definitions

Ensure that the project has been locked

Editing Object Definitions

Page 516: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 516/1241

Type in a value, or. . .

Pencil indicates

object is locked

and editable

Creating a New Object Definition

Select the desired object type in the Object Explorer 

Create a new record in the Object List Editor 

2. Select a project from

the picklist

1. Enter a unique

name

3. Assign values to

properties, as

Page 517: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 517/1241

p p p ,

Only locked projects

are available for

object creation

Changed Flag

Indicates records that have been modified since the c

date

Is set whenever a record is edited

Is cleared by resetting the changed date value

Page 518: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 518/1241

Is cleared by resetting the changed date value

Validating Object Definitions

Determines the correctness of selected object definitio

repository

Includes all child object definitions for the selected pare

definitions

Page 519: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 519/1241

Is based on a set of Siebel-defined rules

Error

Warning Use

disa

d

Validating Object Definitions Continued

Select the object definition to validate

Right-click and select Validate

Click Start in the Validate dialog box

Page 520: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 520/1241

Violations appearin Errors list Click

Valid

d

Archiving Projects

Projects can be archived to .sif files

Select the project (or projects) to be archived

Select Tools > Add to Archive

Select an existing (or create a new) archive file

Page 521: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 521/1241

Click Save in the Export to Archive File dialog box

Archive Files

Contain projects exported from a repository

 Available for importing into other repositories

Have .sif extension by default

Are used to share projects among developers

Page 522: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 522/1241

 Are used to share projects among developers

 Are used to back up projects Can be version-controlled using source code control s

 Archive file

Archive Recommendations

 Archive the entire project

Do not archive individual objects

Could result with inconsistent object definitions

Difficult to recover from a partial or incomplete archive

Page 523: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 523/1241

Difficult to recover from a partial or incomplete archive

Will only save a few minutes per day compared to arch

project

 Archive at appropriate intervals

Prior to implementing a large amount of work

 After testing a section of work

Several times per day during heavy development

Importing Object Definitions

Object definitions in an archive file can be imported in

local repository on the developer workstation

 Appear in the current active repository

To import object definitions

Page 524: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 524/1241

p j

Select Tools > Import from Archive

Select the archive file

Indicate how to resolve conflicting object definitions

Resolve Import Conflicts

Set the default conflict resolution

Page 525: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 525/1241

 Adjust individual resolutions by right-clicking them in t

differences” list

Compare Objects

Displays differences between the selected object defi

another one:

In the current local repository

In an archive file

Page 526: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 526/1241

In the repository on the server 

 Allows developers to identify differences while compa

objects

Delete individual child object definitions

Copy individual child object definitions in either directio

Page 527: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 527/1241

Compare Objects Continued

Examine the differences in the Compare Objects wind

Page 528: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 528/1241

Definitions with

difference highlight

Differences displayed

Compare Objects Continued

To compare two object definitions in the developer re

Select two object definitions to be compared (by SHIFT

Select Tools > Compare Objects > Selected

Modifying definitions is supported

Page 529: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 529/1241

Copy selected control

Delete selected contr

Source Code Control Integration

 Automate integration with source code control for repo

data

Creates a

Page 530: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 530/1241

Check archive

into code

management

system

Creates a

when pro

checke

ODBC to

and lo

databa

Backing Up the Development Database

Is achieved by copying the local database file (.dbf)

Backs up the entire database

Page 531: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 531/1241

Windows

copy/paste

Compiling

Compile to produce an .srf file to test the configuration

Reads object definitions from repository and creates a

representation to be accessed by siebel.exe at run time

Compile into .srf file located in the objects directory of

li ti

Page 532: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 532/1241

application

Repository

Data

Object

Manager 

Configured

application

Compiling

Compile Projects

When starting and at milestones

Use Compile All Projects to generate a new .srf file

Compile only selected projects or locked projects for

incremental compile

Page 533: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 533/1241

Back up the .srf file

prior to full compile

To compile projects:

Select Tools > Compile

Projects

Select project or projects

Compile into the

client directory

Copy the .srf file to create backups

Create an initial backup copy before starting developm

Create additional backups after major milestones

Rename the copies and compile into siebel.srf 

Backing Up the Configuration File

Page 534: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 534/1241

Using the original siebel.srf name for development elim

need to edit .cfg files to point to a renamed .srf 

Original .srf 

Copy .srf file after major

milestones to create backups

Compile into siebel.srf

Rapid Unit Testing

Run-time behavior when usercompiles SRF

If Web client is running:

 Allows developers to test changes in a local instance

Developer Web Client

Page 535: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 535/1241

eb c e s u g

 At end of the compile, thebrowser window refreshes

The user is brought back tothe view that was displayedbefore the compile

If Developer Web Client is notrunning:

If user checked auto-start,Web client is started usingdebug setting

Module Highlights

Object definitions can be created and edited once the locked

Validation determines correctness of object definitions

Developer can generate archives that contain exporte

Page 536: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 536/1241

Share projects for back-up and version-control

Export projects to and import from archive

Highlight import conflicts and project differences

Compile to produce the .srf used to test a configuratio

Compiling:

Reads object definitions from repository tables

Creates a flat file (.srf) accessed by the Siebel applicati

time

Rapid Unit Testing allows developers to test changes

Developer Web Client

Lab

In the lab you will:

Practice editing and validating object definitions in Sieb

Explore the use of diff and archive options in Siebel To

Compile an .srf file

Page 537: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 537/1241

M d l 24 UI L C fi ti

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 538: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 538/1241

2

Module 24: UI Layer Configuration:

Web Templates

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you will be able to:

Describe the role of Siebel Web template files

Describe the role of Siebel tags in template files

List the types of templates

Describe how to register associate and bind a templa

Page 539: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 539/1241

Describe how to register, associate, and bind a templa

Why you need to know

Understanding template structure and how to register,

and bind template files is necessary in order to custom

and feel of your Siebel application

Tailoring the Physical User Interface (UI)

Is performed by editing template files and cascading ssheets

Use an HTML or

a text editor to

Page 540: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 540/1241

modify layouts

Database

Server 

.cfg

UI files

Configuration File

Object

Manager 

•Siebel template files

•Cascading style sheets

•Image files

Use a text editor

to modify colors,

fonts, etc.

Siebel Web Template Files

 Are HTML files that specify how to render the views foapplication in the user’s browser 

Specify the formatting and layout of:

Graphic and text elements

User data

Page 541: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 541/1241

User data

Consist of standard HTML tags and Siebel-specific sw

<table width="100%" class="banner" cellpadding='0'cellspacing='0' border='0'>

<tr>

<td><img src="images/spacer.gif" height="2 width="10"></td>

<td><swe:menu type="Default" width="275" height="bgcolor="#ccccff" fgcolor="#000000" /></td>

S

H

Siebel Web Template Files Continued

 Are stored as separate files outside the Siebel reposit

Located in the WEBTEMPL directory in a Siebel install

Have an .swt extension

 Are edited using text or HTML editor of your choice

Can include other template files via swe:include tag

Page 542: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 542/1241

Can include other template files via swe:include tag

Reference Cascading Style Sheet files (.css)

Page 543: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 543/1241

Cascading Style Sheets

Can be modified to define global parameters Fonts, foreground and background colors, and so forth

Style sheets:

 Are located in PUBLIC\enu\FILES directory in a Siebel

Can be modified by customers

Page 544: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 544/1241

/*globalMenu Definiti/*------------------TR.globalMenu, TD.glo

TD.globalMenu A,TD.globalMenu A:visitTD.globalMenu A:hover{ font-size: 8p

color:#000000background-cofont-weight:n

Can be modified by customers

Edit style sheet files to achieve the desired look and s

your implementation

Backup the current .css files

Edit .css files with your

preferred HTML editor 

From main.css

 Adjust fonts

 Adjust colors

Web Template Object Definition

Is a layer of abstraction between a UI object definition Applet, or Web Page) and the file itself 

UI object definitions reference Web Template object d

References an HTML Web template file

Page 545: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 545/1241

Changes are propagated to all

objects that reference the file

Web Template Placeholders

Contain placeholders for Siebel logical UI definitions

Definitions map to Siebel Web templates

Page 546: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 546/1241

Placeholder 

Web Template Explorer 

Is used in Tools to:

Identify template files

included in a template

file

Examine the contents of

Filter 

Page 547: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 547/1241

a template file Invoke an editor to

modify the template file

Highlights Siebel-supplied

tags for easy viewing

Navigate to View >

Windows > Web

Templates Window

P

te

Types of Web Templates

List Applet Web Templates

Form Applet Web Templates

Page 548: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 548/1241

View Web Templates

Web Page Web Templates

Form Applet Web Templates

Define the layout of form applets Placeholder provides starting point for building applet

Tools’ Web Layout Editor assists you in setting templat

parameters  Accou

uses

GWeb Layout Editor 

Page 549: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 549/1241

Object Manager uses

template to build applet

Tools

UI

List Applet Web Templates

Define the layout of a list applet Standard Interactivity list applets use Base and Edit mo

Base Mode

Page 550: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 550/1241

 An e

an

Edit Mode

List Applet Web Templates Continued

High Interactivity clients use EditList mode

EditList Mode

Page 551: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 551/1241

 An ed

EditList

queryin

dire

View Web Templates

Define the layout of a view Common view templates include:

ViewView Basic

View Detail (Parent with Pointer)

Page 552: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 552/1241

View View Basic

Web Page Web Templates

Define the layout of Web pages such as: Login Page

Error Page

Container Page

Page 553: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 553/1241

The Login Web

template

defines the

layout of the

Login page

Using Template Files

Requires three types of relationships: Registering creates an object definition in the repositor

 Associating identifies the Web template used to render

or view

Binding fastens a control to a specific position on the p

Page 554: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 554/1241

applet to a view

Applets

(View)Templatefile

View

(View) Web template

Appletplaceholders

View Example

Binding

 As

Regi

sw

Creates a Web Template object definition to define thname for the template

Creates a Web Template File object definition to refer

actual physical file

Registering a Template File

Logical name in

repository for template

Page 555: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 555/1241

repository for template

 Actual name of the

physical template fi

Associating an Applet with Its Template

Creates an Applet Web Template object definition to sassociated Web template

Different applet modes can reference different Web tem

Page 556: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 556/1241

 A

u

aMode for

the applet

Associating a View with Its Template

Creates a View Web Template object definition to speassociated Web template

Each view references a single view Web template

Page 557: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 557/1241

Web template u

to render vie

Associating a Web Page with Its Template

Creates a Web Page object definition and sets the WTemplate property

Page 558: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 558/1241

Web page template used to

render Web page

Binding

Maps the components of an applet or view to placehothe corresponding template file

Information is specified in the repository

View Web Template Item

 Applet Web Template Item

Page 559: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 559/1241

Web Page Item Results in the corresponding element being displayed a

Binding AppletsBinding Controls to Applets

Controls/Lists

(Applet)

Template

file

Binding

 Applet

(Applet) Web template

Control

placeholders

 Applets

(Vie

 Applet

placeholders

Binding

Applet Web Template Items

 Are created by the binding process Item Identifier is the “id” attribute value in the swe:contr

 Are used at run time by the Siebel Web Engine to ide

controls that make up an applet

Page 560: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 560/1241

<swe:for-each count="6" startValue="1300" iteratorName="c

<swe:control id="swe:currentId" hintMapType="FormItem">

View Web Template Items

 Are created by the binding process Item Identifier is the “id” attribute value in the swe:apple

 Are used at run time by the Siebel Web Engine to ide

applets that make up a view

Page 561: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 561/1241

<swe:applet hintMapType="Applet" id="1" hintText="Parent

Web Page Items

Identify the links and buttons appearing on a Siebel W Item Identifier is the “id” attribute value in the swe:page

 Are used at run time by the Siebel Web Engine to pos

links and buttons

Page 562: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 562/1241

Registering, associating, and binding adds object defithe repository

Summary of Object Definitions

3. Sp

Page 563: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 563/1241

1.

the

tem

2. Identifies the logical

template used to renderan applet, view, or

container page

comapplet,

pag

Associating

R

B

Module Highlights

Siebel Web Template Files are HTML files that specifrender views for a Siebel application in a user’s brows

Can include other template files

Can reference CSS files

Siebel Tags are a Siebel-developed library of tags in W

Page 564: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 564/1241

template files processed at run time CSSs can be modified to define global parameters su

fonts and colors

The four Web Template types are Form Applet, List A

View, and Web Page

Template files require three types of relationships: AsRegister, and Bind

Lab

In the lab you will: Examine Web templates

Page 565: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 565/1241

Module 25: UI Layer Configuration:

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 566: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 566/1241

2

Applets

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to: Create and modify a list applet

Create and modify a form applet

Why you need to know:

Page 567: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 567/1241

You may want to display new data in the UI

Page 568: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 568/1241

Primary Applet Types: Form Applet

Displays a single record Fields for the record are displayed in a grid or form

Can show more fields at once than a list applet

Page 569: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 569/1241

Creating a List Applet

Follow these steps to create a new list applet …

1. Create new applet object definition

1. Create new applet object definition

2. Associate applet template with object defin

2. Associate applet template with object defin

Page 570: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 570/1241

…Or use the List Applet Wizard

 Automates these steps

Generally the preferred method Ensures that object definitions and properties are creat

Ensures that steps are not omitted

Increases developer productivity

Speeds project completion

3. Bind controls and list columns to te3. Bind controls and list columns to temHighly recommended

List Applet Wizard

Use the List Applet Wizard to create a new applet Select File > New Object, select the Applets tab, select

and then click OK Wizard

Page 571: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 571/1241

List Applet Wizard Inputs

The List Applet Wizard requires the following inputs: Project the new applet will be part of 

 Applet name and display title

Business component the applet will reference

The upgrade behavior 

Admin Non preservable Preservable

Page 572: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 572/1241

 Admin, Non-preservable, Preservable The Web templates that will be used for each mode

Base and EditList mode are commonly built using Applet

(Base/EditList)

Edit mode is commonly built using Applet List Edit (Edit/N

The business component fields that will appear in the W

 Additional controls that will be added to the applet

By default, all of the standard buttons are selected

List Applet Wizard Outputs

Creates required object definitions for controls, lists, acolumns

 Associates applet Web templates to the applet

Binds list columns to templates

 Appear as applet Web template items

Invokes the Web Layout Editor

Page 573: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 573/1241

Invokes the Web Layout Editor 

List Web Layout Edit

New applet object definition create

Web Layout Editor 

Is used to add, remove, and reorder applet Web temp Placeholders correspond to item identifiers of applet W

items

Can be invoked from the right-click menu

Page 574: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 574/1241

2. Drag and drop

items from theControls/Columns window

Select and right-

click to delete

controls that you

have added

1. Select the mode

Applet Web Templates

Specify which template is used when the applet is disgiven mode

Contains Applet Web Template items

The controls or list columns that have been bound to th

The item identifier that describes where in the applet th

or list columns should appear Specifies which

Page 575: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 575/1241

or list columns should appear  Specifies whichtemplate to use

Spec

colum

List Column Definitions

Specify: The field that is displayed

The display name that appears at the top of the list colu

May reference a symbolic string

Page 576: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 576/1241

Symbolic Strings

Ensure that the same name appears exactly the samethroughout the application

Define it once, reference it anywhere

Provide a way to manage updates, globally

 Are used by user interface objects such as:

Labels

Page 577: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 577/1241

Labels List columns

 Applet titles

 Are stored in the repository containing words and phr

in UI definitions

Global Dictionary contains many commonly used terms Symbolic String Locale object type allows language tra

Page 578: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 578/1241

Form Applet Wizard

Use the Form Applet Wizard to create a new form app Select File > New Object, select the Applets tab, select

 Applet, and then click OK

Page 579: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 579/1241

Form Applet Wizard Inputs

The Form Applet Wizard requires the following inputs Project that the new applet will be part of 

 Applet name and display title

Business component that the applet will reference

Upgrade behavior 

Admin Non-preservable Preservable M d t

Page 580: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 580/1241

 Admin, Non preservable, Preservable Modes to use

Edit mode is required for all clients

Uses the Applet Form Grid Layout template

Base mode is required for Standard Interactivity clients on

Business component fields to appear in Web layout

Creates controls and binds them to applet Web templates

 Additional controls to be added to applet

By default, all standard buttons are selected

Form Applet Wizard Outputs

The Form Applet Wizard Creates required object definitions for Controls

 Associates applet Web templates to the applet

Binds columns to templates

 Appear as applet Web template items

Invokes the Grid Layout Editor 

Page 581: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 581/1241

Grid Layout

Editor

invoked

Page 582: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 582/1241

Grid Layout Editor Continued

 Allows drag-and-drop layout editing Supports formatting options such as:

 Align controls

Make same

size

Horizontal

spacing

Format

menu. . .

Page 583: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 583/1241

spacing

Vertical

spacing

Web Controls Toolbar 

Supports drag-and-drop creation of controls Contains icons for:

Text controls

Check boxes

Labels HTML

text

HTML

label

Page 584: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 584/1241

Properties for Editing

No Delete, No Insert, No Merge, No Update are set tothe behavior of the applet

Can also be set at the business component level

Most restrictive settings are always used

Business Component Applet

Page 585: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 585/1241

 Affects all applets referencing

this BC, or. . .

. . .can be custom

each appl

Business Component Applet

Preview the Applet

Right-click and select Preview to see how the applet a When finished, right-click and deselect Preview to retu

Grid Layout Editor 

Page 586: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 586/1241

Right-click to preview

the applet

Module Highlights

List applets: Display records simultaneously in a list

Contain fields for one record displayed in a single row

Form applets display a single record and contain field

record in a grid or form

 Applet wizards ensure object definitions are created aare not omitted

Page 587: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 587/1241

pp jare not omitted

Web Layout Editor is used to add, remove, and reord

template items

List column definitions specify field displayed and disp

Symbolic strings ensure that the same name appearsthe same way throughout the application

Lab

In the lab you will: Modify a form applet using the Grid Layout Editor 

Create a new list applet using the wizard

Page 588: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 588/1241

Page 589: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 589/1241

Module 26: UI Layer Configuration:

Applications, Screens, and Views

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 590: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 590/1241

2

Applications, Screens, and Views

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Tailor applications

Configure how a view is accessed on a screen

Change the order of screen views for a screen

Create and administer a view

 Associate a view with a template

Page 591: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 591/1241

Why you need to know:

Enables you to modify the user interface

Logical User Interface

Specifies the layout of the Siebel application

Consists of:

 Applications, screens, views, applets, controls/list colum

This module focuses on views, screens, and applicati

List ColumnUI

Siebel Application Architecture

Page 592: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 592/1241

TableColumn

Screen

Business

Component

Business

Object

ViewApplet

Field

List Column

or Control

U

Layer 

Business

Layer 

Data

Layer 

1

Re

Focus of

modu

Applications

 Are collections of screens through which users can na

Use a container page to display the Siebel Web page

Specify the application-level menus

 Application

-levelmenus

Page 593: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 593/1241

menus

Container

page

The Container Page

Is a Web page that displays the menus, toolbars, scre

and views that appear in the application

Is specified in the Application object definition

One container page per application Container Web

the conta

Page 594: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 594/1241

Container Page Example: Employee Application

Container page specifies application layout

 Application-

level menu Toolbar 

Screen tabs

Link bar 

Page 595: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 595/1241

Message bar 

View

Application-Level Menus

 Are specified in the Menu object type

 Application uses

Generic WEB menu…

…which contains…

Page 596: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 596/1241

Pos

specifie

of appe

Caption sp

text disp

…a list of menu items

Screen Tabs

Contain links to screens

 Are defined as page tabs

Child object of the application

Page 597: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 597/1241

Specifies text

that appears on

the page bar 

Specifie

tab ord

in

Screens

Have a child object type called Screen View that spec

views and categories that appear in the screen

Sequence property specifies where the view appears in

Menu Text property defines the text that appears in Sit

Type property defines the type of view within the scree

Four types: Aggregate category, aggregate view, detail ca

detail view

Page 598: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 598/1241

Specifies where

the view appears

in the screen

Type Property for Screen View

 An aggregate category is a container for a set of view

accessible via a link in the linkbar 

May also contain subcategories

 An aggregate view is a container for a set of views ac

via the visibility filter drop-down list, a link in the link b

Home Page

 Aggregate

category

Page 599: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 599/1241

category

 Aggregate

views

Page 600: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 600/1241

Sequence Editor 

 Assists in defining where view appears in the applicat

Updates the sequence property of the screen view obje

Lists four screen view types in hierarchy

Page 601: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 601/1241

Righ

s

Rig

invo

View

Consists of one or more applets

References a business object that defines the relation

between data in the view

Is associated with a Web template that defines its layo

Page 602: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 602/1241

View and Templates

Views use templates to organize data layout

Menu Branding

Screen Tabs

Toolbars

View

Container Page

Template

View WebTemplate

Form

List

Control

placeholders

Page 603: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 603/1241

Ticker 

Web Template

Tree

 Applet

placeholder 

Selecting a View Template

Find an existing view that has desired layout

Examine the View Web Template object definition to d

the view template to use

The Account list view…

Page 604: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 604/1241

…uses the View Detail (Parent with Pointe

View Wizard

Use the View Wizard to create a new view

Select File > New Object, select View, and then click O

Page 605: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 605/1241

View Wizard Inputs

The View Wizard requires the following inputs:

Project that the new view will be part of 

View name and display title

Business object that the view will reference

The upgrade behavior 

 Admin, Non-preservable, Preservable

The Web templates that will be used

Page 606: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 606/1241

The applets that make up the view

These applets will appear in the Web layout

View Wizard Outputs

The View Wizard:

Creates a view object

References view to a business object

 Associates Web templates to the view

Invokes the Web Layout Editor Creates

view

Page 607: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 607/1241

Web Layout Editor 

Is launched by the View Wizard

Can be launched by right-clicking a view definition in t

Page 608: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 608/1241

Right-click and select

Edit Web Layout

Web Layout Editor Continued

Displays the current layout of the view

 Applet window shows the applets available for display

view

Constrained by the view’s business object property

Page 609: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 609/1241

2. Drop onto

placehol

1. Drag applet

from Appletwindow

View Web Template Items

 Are applets that have been bound to a view

Item identifier specifies where they are to appear 

Used in the markup language tag that specifies correspon

in a template

Page 610: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 610/1241

Binds a control to

specific position

on Web page

Register and Assign View

Views must be administered in the client to make them

to users

Navigate to Administration - Application > Views in the

application to register the view

Copy and paste the view name from the object definition

the view record

Navigate to Administration - Application > Responsibiliassign the view to one or more responsibilities

A i th i t d l f it t ti d t

Page 611: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 611/1241

 Assign the view to developers for unit testing and to users

testing and production

1. Register the view 2. Assign the view

Module Highlights

 Applications are groups of screens through which use

navigate

Screens are containers for views

Screen views come in four types: aggregate view, aggr

category, detail category, and detail view

Views:

Consist of one or more applets

Reference a BO that defines the relationships between

Page 612: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 612/1241

Reference a BO that defines the relationships between

view

 Are associated with a Web template that defines their l

Lab

In the lab you will:

Create a view

 Add the view to a screen using a specified view naviga

mechanism

 Administer the new view

Page 613: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 613/1241

2

Module 27: UI Layer Configuration:

Drilldowns

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 614: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 614/1241

2

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Configure drilldown to a related view

Enable the thread bar 

Why you need to know:

Enables you to add drilldowns to assist users with navi

Enables you to activate the thread bar to assist users

Page 615: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 615/1241

Navigation Using Drilldown

You can configure list columns or controls for drilldow

When the user clicks the hyperlinked value, the applica

navigates to another view

You can configure drilldown as static or dynamic

Static: Clicking the hyperlink always navigates to the sa

view

Dynamic: Clicking the hyperlink navigates to a target videtermined by values shown in the current view

Page 616: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 616/1241

Static Drilldown: Same Business Component

Drill down to another view, keeping the business com

(BC) context

Contact record inVisible Contacts

list view

Page 617: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 617/1241

list view

Same contact

record in Contact

Detail view

Configuring Drilldown Within Same Business Co

Create a new drilldown object

Set the Hyperlink Field and View properties to enable s

drilldown

Drilldown object is child of an applet object

Page 618: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 618/1241

Specifies the BC field to be

highlighted for drilldown

Sp

ta

Static Drilldown: Different Business Component

Drill down to another view, changing the business com

context

Related account

The account field

contact record i

Contacts list v

Page 619: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 619/1241

Related account

record in the Account

Detail - Contacts view

Configuring Drilldown to Different Business Com

Create a new drilldown object for the applet

Set Hyperlink field and View properties as before

Set Business Component, Source Field, and Destinatio

properties to enable drilldown to a view based on a diff

record

Page 620: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 620/1241

BC i

Foreign Key field

in record pointing

to target BC

Primary Key

(default

Page 621: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 621/1241

Matching Conditions

Identify one or more matching conditions to trigger dri

to a specific target view For example:

Personal

Contact

Detail View

Personal

Contact?

C t t

 Y

N

Page 622: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 622/1241

Determine the order to check the matching conditions Conditions can involve different fields

Multiple matches could occur for a given record

Contact

Detail View

Configuring Dynamic Drilldown

Create the drilldown objects for each view

Multiple drilldown objects with same hyperlink but differ

Set sequence number to determine where to look for

drilldown destinations

The drilldown object with the lowest sequence number

for dynamic drilldown destination child object definition

The Original and Personal

d illd bj t h th

The Original drilldown oblower sequence number, so

for dynamic drilldown de

Page 623: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 623/1241

drilldown objects have the same

Hyperlink field but different views

for dynamic drilldown de

Configuring Dynamic Drilldown Continued

Create a dynamic drilldown destination definition for e

condition Each condition specifies a destination drilldown object

Recommended practice: Create a default dynamic drill

destination to specify a desired view if there are no ma

If no default is configured, navigates to the view specified

parent drilldown object

Page 624: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 624/1241

Field to

check

Value to

check for 

Separate

definition for

each destination

Destination

Thread Bar 

Tracks previous business object (view) and active rec

Updates whenever the user navigates to a different bobject

Provides hyperlinks to previous views

 Allows user to backtrack easily

Hyperlink to prior active record in the thread

Page 625: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 625/1241

Thread Properties

Specifies the text that appears in the thread bar 

Specifies the record to

“remember” in the

Thread fieldThread title

Page 626: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 626/1241

Thread Title property specifies

prior business object in

hyperlink; if not entered,

application uses Title property

hyperlink

Module Highlights

List columns or controls can be configured for drilldow

Drilldowns can be static or dynamic

Static drilldowns always navigate the user to the same

Dynamic drilldowns navigate the user to a target view d

by the values shown in the current view

Static drilldowns can be configured to drill down to the

business component or to a different business compon Thread bar allows user to easily backtrack

C fi d i T l

Page 627: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 627/1241

Configured in Tools

Lab

In the lab you will:

Create and configure dynamic drilldowns

Enable and configure thread support

Page 628: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 628/1241

Page 629: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 629/1241

2

Module 28: Business Layer

Configuration: Joins

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 630: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 630/1241

2

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Create a join that brings data from a standard table intobusiness component

Create a join that brings data from a party table into a s

business component

Create a join that brings data from a party table into an

business component

Why you need to know:

Page 631: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 631/1241

y you eed o o

Enables you to configure your company’s business log

Joined Tables Review

Business components can include data from related j

tables Brings in data as needed to meet the business compon

requirements

For display in applets

For use in processing by the business component

Opportunity

Name Sales StageDescription

Page 632: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 632/1241

S_OPTY

R OW  _I   D

NAME 

DE  S  C   _T E X T 

 C  UR C Y   _ C D

S_STG

R OW  _I   D

NAME 

P HA S E   _ C D

 S T  G  _ ORDE R

Base table Join

Three Definitions Are Used to Implement a Join R

Join definition specifies the joined table

Join specification specifies the FK and PK used to relbase and joined tables

Single-value field (SVF) references the join object def

1. Join

definition

Page 633: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 633/1241

2. Join

specification

Join Example

Will bring Sales Stage data from S_STG into the Opp

S_OPTY is the base table, S_STG is the joined table

Page 634: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 634/1241

From S_OPTY From S_STG

Building a Join

1. Locate the Data Source

2. Examine Existing Joins

3. Diagram the Join

4 Create the Join Definition

Page 635: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 635/1241

4. Create the Join Definition

5. Create the Join Specification

6. Map the Single Value Field(s)

1. Locate the Data Source

Identify potential data sources

Peruse application for data thatyou seek

The required data could exist in

another business component

Once you find the data in the UI,

identify the specific table and

column where the data resides

Trace down from the UI element

t th t bl l

Page 636: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 636/1241

to the table column

For assistance, use the job

aid from the Business

Component labIdentify table

and column that

contains data

you seek

2. Examine Existing Joins

Determine if a join already exists

Peruse existing joins for joins that might be candidates Oracle has already provided many commonly-used join

If a join exists that meets data display requirements, u

Otherwise, create a new join

Page 637: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 637/1241

Examine alias

for candidates

The Join Diagram template simplifies join creation

Gather information first, then create the join

Indicate each of the numbered items

3. Diagram the Join

Business Component: Opportunity

Single Value Field: Sales Stage Id

S OPTY S STG2. Base

Join Diagram Worksheet

Page 638: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 638/1241

Base Table Joined TableFK PK

 C  URR  _ S 

T  G  _I   D

_R OW  _I   D

R OW  _I   D

_NAME 

table

5. Foreign key

column

4. Create the Join Definition

Table property specifies joined table

 Alias property is the name of join definition  Alias always defaults to the joined table’s name

Displayed in ALL CAPS

 Additional aliases for self-joins or multiple joins to the s

are specified by the developer 

Recommended practice is to use Initial Caps

Page 639: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 639/1241

Joined table

Name of

 join

Defaul

 joined

5. Create the Join Specification

Specify foreign key field of the base business compon

Source Field property Specify primary key column of the joined table in the D

Column property

Base Table

 C  URR  _

S_OPTYR OW  _I   

R OW  _I  

Page 640: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 640/1241

_ S T  G  _I   D

D D

FK

Page 641: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 641/1241

 An option in the join definition

Set Outer Join Flag to TRUE to return all records fromtable, even when there is no related row in the joined

Outer joins will affect performance

Do not enable outer join if there is always a related row

 joined table

Outer Join Flag

Page 642: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 642/1241

Ou

en

Outer Join Flag Continued

105AT&T

200 PCS CS

Laptop nits001

CURR_ 

STG_IDDESC_TEXTNAMEROW_ID

S_OPTY

05 – Won102

03 - Closing101

NAMEROW_ID

S_STG

When Outer Join Flag is TRUE (checked), a left outer

used  All records in source table are displayed

Even if there is no related record in the target table

Records with no related record in target table display ta

as null

Page 643: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 643/1241

FKPK

NULL

Broadband

e2e

200 PCS Puma

Laptop EB003

106

Imperial

Tobacco

200 PCS Puma

Laptop EB002

105 AT&TLaptop units001

02 - Qualifica106

01 - Prospec105

06 – Short Li104

07 - Selected103

 All records

displayed from

source

No correspo

for Broadba

Joins and Party Business Data

Joins and Party Business Components

Bringing Party Data into a Standard Business Comp

Bringing Party Data into a Party Business Compone

Page 644: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 644/1241

Joins and Party Business Components Review

Party Business Components have S_PARTY as the b

but store main data in S_PARTY extension tables  An implicit join is used to reference fields from extens

Used when relationship between tables is known

 Appears in Join property on SFV

Does not appear as Join object definition

S PARTY S CONTACT

Contact

Ma

i

S

First Name Last Name Birth Date

Page 645: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 645/1241

S_PARTYR OW  _I   D

NAME 

P ART Y   _T Y P E   _ C D

P ART Y   _ UI   D

S_CONTACTR OW  _I   D

F  S T   _NA

ME 

L AF  S T   _

NAME 

P AR  _R OW  _I   D

BI   RT H  _

DT 

FKPK

Bringing Party Data into a Standard Business Co

Example: Bringing account data into the Opportunity b

component for display in an Opportunity applet

Page 646: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 646/1241

Opportunity

Name AccountDescription

Standard business

component

Data from an S_PARTY

extension table

Three Definitions Bring Party Data into a Standar

The Join definition specifies which S_PARTY extensio

use The Join specification specifies to use PAR_ROW_ID

The SVF is the desired column from the joined extens

1. Join

definition

Page 647: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 647/1241

2. Joinspecification

3. Single-

value field

Join Specification with Party: Similar to Standard

Destination references PAR_ROW_ID, not ROW_ID

Keys reference base to extension to join, rather than  join

Standard Party

S_OPTYR OW

S_STGR OW

NA M

 C  UR

S_ORG_EXTR OW

P A R

S_OPTYR OW

P R  _

T

Typically references

ROW_ID

NA M

Page 648: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 648/1241

PKFK FFK

Oppty Base Joined Table Oppty Base

W  _I   D

W  _I   D

ME 

RR  _ S T  G  _I   D

W  _I   D

R  _R OW  _

I   D

W  _I   D

PK

Joined /

_DE P T   _ O U

  _I   D

ME 

Data

resides

in _EXT

001 001

Bringing Party Data into a Party Business Compo

Example: Bringing parent account data into the Accou

display in an Account applet  A join in a BC that refers back to data in that same BC

Account

refe

Page 649: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 649/1241

Account

Name Parent Account Name Parent Account LoLocation

Join Definition, Bringing Party Data into a Party B

Must use an explicit join to an extension table based o

appropriate foreign keys The alias must be different from those used by implicit

BC

Must not use an existing implicit join to that extension

an expl

Since an implicit join to

S ORG EXT already

Page 650: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 650/1241

. . .an expl

be used,

have

_ _ y

exists. . .

Map Field to Column in Party Table

Select the appropriate explicit join

Do not use an implicit join to the table Select the desired column in the joined table

Set the appropriate type (DTYPE_TEXT, etc.)

Page 651: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 651/1241

Select t

instead o

Module Highlights

BCs can include data from related joined tables

Join definitions and join specifications define how to  joined table data

Single-value fields reference the join definition and de

field to access in the joined table

To create a join:

Locate the data source, examine existing joins, diagramcreate the join definition, create the join specification, a

the SVF

Joins that in ol e part data are similar to standard d

Page 652: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 652/1241

Joins that involve party data are similar to standard d

however, when bringing party data into:

 A non-party BC, create a join specification based on PA

 A party BC, use the appropriate explicit join

Lab

In the lab you will:

Examine references when a join is not present as well a join is present

Create a join that brings in data from joined table and d

in the UI

Page 653: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 653/1241

2

Module 29: Business Layer

Configuration: Existing Business

Components and Fields

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 654: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 654/1241

2

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Edit business component properties to capture busines Describe business component view modes

Edit field properties to capture business logic

Specify business component and field user properties

Why you need to know: Editing the properties of business components and field

you to more accurately and fully capture your business

Page 655: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 655/1241

Business Component Properties

Capture business logic

Include: Properties for editing

No Delete

No Insert

No Merge

No Update

Owner Delete

Search Specification

Sort Specification

Page 656: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 656/1241

Sort Specification

Business Component Properties

Properties for Editing

Owner Delete Property

Search Specification Property

Sort Specification Property

Page 657: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 657/1241

Properties for Editing

Set editing properties at the business component leve

prevent deleting, inserting, merging, and updating recapplets

Example: To maintain record continuity, users cannot

change price lists once they have been created

Page 658: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 658/1241

Properties for Editing Continued

These properties also appear on applets

Most restrictive settings are always used

Set these properties to FALSE at the business compon

you can make exceptions at the applet level

Business Component Applet

Page 659: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 659/1241

 Affects all applets referencing

this BC, or. . .

. . .can be custom

each appl

Owner Delete Property

Set the Owner Delete property to TRUE to enable onl

owner of a record to delete it The primary on a team-based business component is t

the record

JRUBIN is primary owner;

only JRUBIN can delete

Page 660: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 660/1241

Search Specification Property

Specifies records to be retrieved by the business com

Typically used when there are multiple business compobased on the same table

Conditional

t t tBC field

Page 661: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 661/1241

statement

Search Specification Expression

Consists of field names, constants, functions, logical o

and comparison operators Example: For a given user, Contact(All) retrieves:

 All contacts where the Personal Contact flag is “N”

 All personal contacts belonging to the user 

Field name in [ ]. . . Operator 

Page 662: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 662/1241

Logical operat. . .must

match exactly

Search Specification Considerations

 Appear on business component properties and apple

Search specifications are part of the WHERE clause fothat display this business component

Predefined queries may also contribute to the WHERE cla

Search specifications on the applet are combined with

specifications on the business component with an AND

resulting SQL statement

 Avoid mutually exclusive search specifications  Avoid competing search specifications that preclude re

Li t C lUI

Page 663: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 663/1241

Screen

Business

Component

Business

Object

ViewApplet

Field

List Column

or Control

UI

Layer 

Business

Layer 

Sort Specification Property

Determines the sort order of the retrieved records

Use (DESC) or (DESCENDING) to sort that field in rev

Cannot be set at the applet level

. . .configure a

sort specification

M

To sort by last

name, then first

name. . .

Page 664: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 664/1241

Ensure

exists t

sort s

BusComp View Mode

Specifies that the BC is subject to Access Control

Owner Type property identifies the Access Control meclimits records a user can access

BCs may have multiple access mechanisms

 Allows records to be associated with different owner ty

Supports multiple view modes

Identifies the

Page 665: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 665/1241

Identifies the

 Access

Control

mechanism

BusComp View Mode, Example

The Opportunity business component has a position-

BusComp View mode

Invoked when user navigates to the My Opportunities o

Team’s Opportunities view

Visibility MVField property is set to Sales Rep, so app

reads list of positions from Sales Rep MVF to determi

visibility

The My Opportunities view shows records with the use

position listed in the Sales Rep MVF

The My Team’s Opportunities view shows records whe

direct or indirect reports are primaries on the Sales Re

Page 666: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 666/1241

direct or indirect reports are primaries on the Sales Re

Person- or position-based

BusComp View modes

are invoked by My views

For each

application user’s curre

positions in S

Field Properties

Customize fields by editing property values

Setting field properties at the business component levthem across all applets that reference the business co

Each applet references one, and only one, business co

Propert

busines

Page 667: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 667/1241

level affe

that re

busines

Business Component Field Properties

Required and Read Only

Validation

Default Values

Calculated Fields

Page 668: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 668/1241

Required and Read Only Properties

Setting Required to TRUE prevents user from leaving

Setting Read Only to TRUE prevents user from editin

1. Contacts require

last names

2. Required

marked w

asteris

Page 669: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 669/1241

3. Attempting

without last na

error mes

Validation Property

Checks the rule when a record is saved to ensure tha

data is valid

Message is customizable

Can refer only to business component fields in the sa

Page 670: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 670/1241

Birth datemust be

prior to the

current date

Text displayedwhen

validation fails

Specifyexisting string

in SRF. . .

. . .or enter acustom

message

Validation Property Continued

Rules are expressed as a combination of logical oper

constants, field names, and predefined functions

Constant

Operator 

Field name

Logical operator 

Page 671: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 671/1241

Default Values for Fields

Pre Default Value

 Automatically assigns a value to a field for a new recor

Post Default Value

 Assigns a value to a field, if not entered by the user, be

record is inserted into the database

Example: If the user does not designate a contact as

the system assumes it is not personal, and sets it to N

Page 672: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 672/1241

Calculated Fields

Derive their value from values in other fields in the sa

of the business component in which the calculated fie

Cannot be stored in the database; therefore, there is

associated column

To enable, set Calculated property to TRUE (checked

Column

is empty

Page 673: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 673/1241

calculated

stored in t

Restrictions on Calculated Fields

Calculated fields are read-only

System does not validate values of calculated fields Sorting on calculated fields is not supported

Querying on calculated fields is supported

Performance depends upon whether functions in the qu

expression can be incorporated into the SQL statemen

Page 674: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 674/1241

Calculated Value Property

Is an expression built from:

Field names in the same business component

Field names from the parent business component

Current BC must have the child in a detail view

Standard functions

String, numeric, and logical operators

Page 675: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 675/1241

System fu

User Properties

 Are object definitions added as children to an applet,

component, control, field, or list column

Used to configure specialized behavior beyond what

configured in the parent object definition's properties

Each user property contains its own conditional logic

Can implement specific, custom IF/THEN logic

Many use their own unique syntax

Can be used as a declarative alternative to scripting

 A wide variety of user properties exist, such as:

BC Read Only Field, Field Read Only Field, and On Fie

Page 676: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 676/1241

Set

BC User Property Scenario

Business challenge

Based on values the end user enters at run time, dyna

disallow updates to record

Business solution

Use the BC Read Only Field user property

 Allows you to specify a field on the business component t

determines whether individual records are read-only

Example: Shipped orders cannot accept changes to orline item records in an existing order 

Order has shipped, and it is too late to add more line item

Page 677: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 677/1241

Order Entry

- Line Items

Order Entry

- Line Items

Y

N

BC Read

Only FlagField that flags

whether record

is read-only

Target

BC

Read-onl

Writable

User Property, BC Read Only Field Example

Create a calculated field on the Order Entry – Line Ite

business component whose value is either Y or N

BC Read Only Field user property requires an input va

N, so create a calculated field whose values are limited

two values

For this example, create a calculated field named BC

Flag with the expression: IF([Status] = "Shipped", "Y"

This sets the value of the calculated field to Y if the stashipped, N otherwise

Page 678: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 678/1241

BC Read Only Flag SVF has a

value of Y if the status of the

item is shipped, N otherwise

User Property, BC Read Only Field Example Contin

 Add the BC Read Only Field user property

Set the Value property to BC Read Only Flag

Value is the name of the calculated field on the BC

When the value of this field is “Y”, the current record is

Create User Pro

references the ca

Page 679: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 679/1241

User Property, Field Read Only Field

Sets a specific field in a business component to be re

Field Read Only Field: Location sets Location field as t

a conditional statement

Value is the name of a field that contains a Boolean va

 At run-time, if condition is met, field is set to read only

This condition

ff t

Page 680: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 680/1241

. . .depending on the

Boolean value in this field

. . .this target field. . .

S_ORG_EXT

Y1

INT_ORG_FLGROW_ID

affects. . .

Location is

not read

only

N

INT_ORG_FLG

Adding a User Property

Is done via a picklist in the Name property in the Busi

Component User Properties window

Only those user properties allowed for parent BC are d

Page 681: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 681/1241

Displays user properties

allowed for this BC

Module Highlights

BC properties are set to control behavior:

Editing properties, Owner Delete, Search Specification

Specification

BC field properties are set to control behavior:

Required, Read Only, Validation, Pre and Post Default

Case

BusComp View Mode specifies BC is subject to acces

Calculated fields derive their value from other fields in

record of the BC in which the calculated field resides

User Properties have their own specialized logic that

added to a BC

Page 682: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 682/1241

added to a BC

Declarative alternative to scripting

Lab

In the lab you will:

Incorporate business logic into the application by confi

properties of business components and fields

Page 683: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 683/1241

3

Module 30: Business Layer

Configuration: New Business

Components and Fields

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 684: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 684/1241

3

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Create a new business component (BC)

 Add a business component to a business object

Why you need to know:

Enables you to incorporate additional business entities

correspond to business components in a standard Sieb

application

Enables you to tailor your business logic

Page 685: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 685/1241

Business Challenge

Siebel-provided business components capture most c

used business entities, but they do not cover every po

Example: Sales organizations might record personal d

contacts, such as:

What colleges the contact attended

Name of college, years attended, major field of study, spo

honors received, and so on

The contact’s favorite restaurants Name and location, price range, type of cuisine, and so o

To capture this kind of information may require:

Multiple fields to capture the details

Page 686: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 686/1241

1:M or M:M relationship to the parent

Business Solution: Create New Business Compo

To capture this sort of information, create new busine

components

For example, create college and restaurant child BCs o

Contact parent BC

Used to add entities specific to your organization that

the Siebel repository

You can base these business components on tables s

Oracle Standard

Extension

1:M

Page 687: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 687/1241

M:M

Scenario: 1:M Relationship With Existing Table

Example: Create Colleges Attended and Favorite Res

business components for sales organization

Colleges Attended and Favorite Restaurants have a 1

relationship with Contact

Requires two business components, Colleges Attended

Favorite Restaurants

One for Contact : Colleges Attended

One for Contact : Favorite Restaurants

When creating a BC with a 1:M relationship with the p

business component, consider using a 1:M extension

Page 688: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 688/1241

Colleges Attended FavoRestauContact

Review: Standard 1:M Extension Tables

Predefined in the repository for many business compo

Have name of parent table appended with _XM

Contains many predefined

 ATTRIB columns of varying

type

NAME column stores thename of the child entity

Page 689: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 689/1241

PAR_ROW_ID column

stores foreign key toROW_ID in main table

TYPE column identifies the

child business component

User Key

TYPE, PAR_ROW_ID, and NAME serve as a user ke

table

These three columns are required

Must provide values for all three columns when creating a

Combined value of the three columns must be unique

S_CONTACT_XMR OW  _I   D

T Y P E 

P AR  _R OW  _

NAME  User Key

Page 690: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 690/1241

_I   D

Business Component Wizard

Use the Business Component Wizard to create a new

component

Select File > New Object, select BusComp, and then cl

Wiza

Page 691: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 691/1241

Business Component Wizard Inputs

The Business Component Wizard requires the followi

Project new business component will be part of 

Business component name

Must be unique among all business components in all pro

The business component’s table name

Fields that will be part of this BC

Selected in the wizard by specifying Table Column, then

field name Specify TYPE column and relate it to Type field

Specify PAR_ROW_ID column and relate it to Id field

Specify NAME column and relate it to Name field

Use ATTRIB_ columns for additional data

E

U

Page 692: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 692/1241

Columns are limited to the table you select in wizard

Use a separate column for each field

Business Component Wizard Outputs

The Business Component Wizard:

Creates a business component object and its child obje

definitions

Creates fields and relates them to table columns

 Aside from what you specify in the wizard, uses default fie

values; for example, Owner Delete is set to FALSE

Creates new

fields and relates

Page 693: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 693/1241

fields and relates

them to columns

Set the Pre-Default Value

 Automatically assigns a value to a field for a new reco

For extension tables, set Predefault Value property of t

field to the value used in the BC search specification

Can be used to ensure that the user key is populated

Matches the v

in the Sear

Specificati

Page 694: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 694/1241

Ensure

recordsof “R

Set Search Specification

Manually set the search specification to match the un

value for the business component

Specifies the records to be retrieved by the business co

Typically used with extension tables

Supports the case where multiple BCs are based on th

extension table

Search r

records

of “Re

Page 695: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 695/1241

of Re

Colleges

 Attended

Multiple Business Components

You can use one table to map multiple user-defined c

business components

Each BC has a unique TYPE value

Stored in the TYPE column of the table

Each BC retrieves only those rows with its TYPE valu

Specify properties on business components and fields

Search Specification

Pre Default Value

S_R OW  _I   DType = College

Page 696: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 696/1241

D

FavoriteRestaurants

Type = Restaurant

Post-Creation Tasks

1. Relate Child and Parent BCs

2. Reference Business Component in Business Obje

3. Enable Display Data in UI

Page 697: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 697/1241

Relate Child and Parent BCs

For each child/parent relationship, associate the newl

configured child business component to the parent:

Create a link definition to relate child and parent record

Favorite

Restaurants

Parent

Colleges

 Attended

Contact

Contact/FavoriteRestaurants Link

Contact/Colle Attended Lin

Page 698: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 698/1241

Child Child

Relate Child and Parent BCs Continued

Create a separate link for each

child/parent relationship

In our scenario, Contact/FavoriteRestaurants and Contact/Colleges

 Attended

Link creation is same as with any

standard BC

This will be the link you specify in thebusiness object

Parent

i

Page 699: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 699/1241

is

Contact

Reference Business Component in Business

Create a Business Object Component definition for ea

business component

The business object defined for the parent is the one to

The business component is the child you just created

Set the Link property

Parent

BC

Page 700: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 700/1241

Child

BC

Link you

 just created

Enable Display Data in UI

Build applets and views as required to display data fro

business component

To prevent users from changing the value, do not displfield

 A

W

Page 701: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 701/1241

Creating a Standalone Business Component

May be necessary when your company's business log

a new table be added to the database

In most cases, Siebel's extensive database should meeyour needs. There could be exceptions.

To create a standalone BC:

Create a new table to hold BC data

 Add appropriate columns to this table

Create a new BC and add BC fields Create a new Business Object and reference the BC in

Enable data display in the UI

Standalone BCs are based on standalone tables and h

relationships to other BCs or tables

Page 702: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 702/1241

relationships to other BCs or tables

Module Highlights

Create a new BC as child of an existing BC to capture

information

When possible, use predefined _XM tables to store d

Use the BC Wizard to create a new BC

When using extension tables, use one extension table

multiple child BCs

Each BC has a unique TYPE value

Specify properties on BC and fields

Include required fields, such as Type and NAME

Create a link definition to associate new child BCs wit

 Add new BC to a BO, then create applets and views t

d t

Page 703: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 703/1241

data

Create a standalone BC, when necessary

Lab

In the lab you will:

Create and display a new business component based

extension table

Page 704: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 704/1241

Page 705: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 705/1241

3

Module 31: Business Layer

Configuration: Picklists

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 706: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 706/1241

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Describe the differences between dynamic and static p

 Administer a list of values

Configure a static or dynamic picklist

Why you need to know:

Enables you to add picklists to your Siebel application

Page 707: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 707/1241

Picklists

 Allow users to populate one or more single-value field

selecting a value from a list

Enforces business rules and policies Makes data entry faster 

Reduces errors

Can be either static or dynamic

Page 708: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 708/1241

Static Picklist

Displays values in a drop-down list for user selection

Copies the selected value into destination field

No link to the original picklist data

Can be bounded or unbounded

Bounded picklist forces users to enter only a value in th

Unbounded picklist permits users to enter any value int

Draws values from picklist data managed by an admin

Values displayed in static picklists do not change during

D d

Page 709: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 709/1241

Drop-down

listUI visual cue for

static picklist

Static Picklist Values

 Are stored for all static picklists in the S_LST_OF_VA

 Appear in List of Values or LOV Explorer administrativ

 Administration – Data > List of Values (or LOV Explorer

Each have a type, which indicates which static picklist

belongs to

Values for

the MR MS

Page 710: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 710/1241

the MR_MS

static picklist

Administering a Static Picklist

Use Administration – Data > List of Values Explorer v

Select an existing picklist or create a new picklist

the List of Values - Types applet

Expand the type and select the child Values folde

Edit the picklist values in the List of Values (LOV)

Page 711: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 711/1241

Dynamic Picklist

Displays values in a pick applet

Draws values from a business component (BC) with r

edited by users Values are dynamic and depend on current BC records

Is used to update joined fields

Copies foreign key reference to the selected value into

field

UI visual cue for

dynamic picklistPick ap

displayed

select icon

Page 712: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 712/1241

Picklist Terms

Siebel picklists:

 Are associated with a field in the originating business c

Draw values from a pick business component

Opportunity: originating

business component

Page 713: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 713/1241

 Account: pick

business component

Create a New Picklist

Use the Pick List Wizard to create a new static or dyn

picklist

Select File > New Object > Pick List

Page 714: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 714/1241

Wizard Inputs for a Static Picklist

The Pick List Wizard requires the following inputs:

Project the created picklist object will be part of 

Business component and field populated by the picklist Picklist name and type (Static)

Business

component andfield populated

by the picklist

Pi

Page 715: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 715/1241

Wizard Inputs for a Static Picklist Continued

The Pick List Wizard requires the following inputs (con

Bounded or unbounded picklist

Type value (example: MR_MS) Pick list values

May use existing type and/or values in S_LST_OF_VAL

Enter values

for static

picklist

Page 716: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 716/1241

Pick List Wizard Outputs for a Static Picklist

The Pick List Wizard creates:

 A picklist object

 A pick map that specifies values copied to the S_LST_Otable

Values in S_LST_OF_VAL for the picklist

 Activated drop-down list column or control in applets co

the originating field

o

Page 717: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 717/1241

Drop-down

control

Activating a Drop-Down List Column or Control

The Pick List Wizard may activate drop-down control

field

The wizard displays all applets displaying the originatin Only the applets locked by developer will be activated

Wizard sets list column or control Runtime property to

 A drop-down arrow appears as a cue

Page 718: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 718/1241

Ru

Wizard Inputs for Dynamic Picklists

The Pick List Wizard requires the following inputs:

Project the created picklist object will be part of 

Originating business component and field for the picklis Picklist name and type (Dynamic)

Originating

business

component andfield

Set type

Dynam

Page 719: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 719/1241

Wizard Inputs for Dynamic Picklists Continued

The Pick List Wizard requires the following inputs (con

 A pick business component

 A field in the pick business component to sort on  A picklist name

 A search specification

Pick busines

component

Business

component fie

to sort on

Page 720: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 720/1241

Wizard Inputs for Dynamic Picklists Continued

The Pick List Wizard requires the following inputs (con

Pick applet properties (No Delete, No Insert, No Update

Merge) Values for a pick map, mapping fields between originat

business components

Defin

m

Page 721: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 721/1241

Pick List Wizard Outputs for a Dynamic Picklist

The Pick List Wizard creates:

 A picklist object

 A pick map constructed in the wizard  A new pick applet, if needed

 Activated list column or control in applets containing the

field

List column or control for originating field must have Runti

set to TRUE

o

Page 722: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 722/1241

o

Field w

ic

Constrained Picklist

Filters values dynamically based on value in parent pi

Values available

when Area is

NetworkVa

w

Parent picklist

Constrained

child picklist

Page 723: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 723/1241

Constraining a Picklist

Create a pick map definition for each field that must m

Set the Constrain property to TRUE for each of the m

fields Filters the pick business component records for matche

Does not copy values for the field

Constrained to

return only Sub- Areas whose

Parent is equal to

the Current Area

Page 724: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 724/1241

Module Highlights

Picklists allow selection of values from a list for one or

single-value fields in an originating business compone

Static picklists: Display values in a drop-down list

Contain static values, which are managed through List

administrative views

Store values in S_LST_OF_VAL table

Dynamic picklists: Display values in a pick applet

Contain dynamic data, which is typically the result of us

transactions

 Access data in pick business component using a foreig

Picklists are created using Siebel Tools’ Pick List Wiza

Page 725: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 725/1241

Picklists are created using Siebel Tools Pick List Wiza

Lab

In the lab you will:

Create a new static picklist

Create a new dynamic picklist

Page 726: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 726/1241

Page 727: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 727/1241

3

Module 32: Configuring Multi-Value

Groups

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 728: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 728/1241

Page 729: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 729/1241

Multi-Value Group

 A multi-value group (MVG) is a set of detail (child) rec

associated with a parent record

The Parent applet displays only one of the child record The MVG applet opens on demand to display all child r

MVG applet

Page 730: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 730/1241

Multi-Value Group Continued

Is an alternative to a detail view for managing parent

child records

Makes effective use of space Does not require dedicated space on a view

 Allows for multiple sets of detail records to be available

single view

Business Address  Account

Page 731: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 731/1241

MVG Team MVG

Multi-Value Group Continued

 Allows users to access child records for multiple pare

in a single list view

Business AddressMVG

TerritoryMVG

IndustrMVG

Page 732: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 732/1241

Multi-Value Group Continued

 Allows for creating queries that include values for field

parent and child records

Quer

Organ

QuerIndus

Quer

Terr

Page 733: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 733/1241

Primaries

Primary key allows fast retrieval of the primary child re

display in the parent applet

 A primary refers to a designated child record

Designating a primary allows one child record to be ret

quickly for display

Supported by a primary foreign key field in the parent

component to reference the child’s primary key (ROW

Siebel Data Model includes many primary foreign keys

S_ORG_EXTR O W  _I  D

 NAME

L O C

P R  _ADDR  _I  D

S_ADDR_ORGR O W  _I  D

ADDR

 CI  TY

 O U  _I  D

Primary

Child BParent BC

Page 734: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 734/1241

Foreign

key

foreignkey

Primaries Performance Example

Three MVGs on a list applet displaying 10 parent reco

requires 31 queries to populate without primaries

One query to populate parent fields in list applet

30 queries (three per parent record) to populate the MV

Multi-value groups

Page 735: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 735/1241

Primaries Performance Example Continued

Using primaries, one query will populate all the fields

applet

 A query using SQL joins populates each MVG with its pchild record

Multi-value groups

Page 736: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 736/1241

Object Types Supporting MVGs

MVGs are implemented in Siebel applications using th

following object types:

Link

Multi-Value Field (MVF)

MVG Applet

Page 737: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 737/1241

Link

Must exist between parent and

child business components in

the MVG

Specifies how to get data

from child business

component

Account

Name Location City

Child business

component

Parent business

component

Page 738: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 738/1241

Business Address

City Street Address

Multi-Value Field (MVF)

Is a field in the parent business component that refere

field in the child business component

Is required for an MVG

S_ORG_EXTR O W  _I  D

 NAME

L O C

EMP   _ C O U N

T

Business Addres

Chi

co

Account

City Stre

Parent business

component

Single-value field Multi-value field

Name Location City

S_ADDR_ORGR O W

 CI  TY

ADD

ZI  P  C

Page 739: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 739/1241

T W  _I  D

TY DR PC ODE

MVG Applet

Displays child business component records

Displays list columns that allow the user to distinguish

record

MVG applets’ type is MVG

Page 740: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 740/1241

Creating a Multi-Value Group

Use the MVG Wizard in Siebel Tools to create a multi

group

Verify that a link between the parent and child businesscomponents exists

Select File > New Object > MVG

Page 741: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 741/1241

Inputs to the MVG Wizard

Provide the following information to the MVG Wizard:

The project that the MVG will belong to

The master (parent) and detail (child) business compon

The name of the multi-value link

The Auto Primary property (discussed later)

The link properties

Page 742: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 742/1241

Setting Auto Primary Property in the MVG Wizard

Set the Auto Primary property to either:

Default (the first child record becomes the primary)

Selected (the highlighted record becomes the primary)

None (the user must specify the primary)

Page 743: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 743/1241

MVG Wizard Output

The MVG Wizard creates an MVG

If no suitable MVG applet exists suitable for the choic

and child business components and MVFs, the wizardthe MVG Applet Wizard

Page 744: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 744/1241

Multi-Value Groups for M:M Relationships

MVGs can be built on M:M relationships as well

Link must specify the Inter Table property

S_ORG_EXTR O W  _I  D

 NAME

L O C

  _P R  _I   ND U S T  _I  D

S_ORG_INDUSTR O W  _I  D

 O U  _I  D

I   ND U S T  _I  D

PK PK

S_INDUR O W  _I  D

 NAME

 SI  C

Ch

Account

Name Location Industry

Industry

Name

Parent BC Multi-valuefield

Intersection

table

Primary

Page 745: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 745/1241

FK FK

PK PK

Configuring MVGs for M:M Relationships

Create object definitions required for 1:M MVGs

Specify an association applet for the MVG applet

 Allows users to select other child records to add to the

 Association

applet

Page 746: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 746/1241

Module Highlights

 A multi-value group (MVG) is a set of detail (child) rec

associated with a parent record

 A primary is a designated child record that is displayeparent’s applet

Speeds retrieval of parent record with primary child rec

display in UI

Supported by a primary foreign key

Objects needed to support an MVG are:

Multi-value fields (MVFs)

 A multi-value link

 A MVG applet

Use the MVG Wizard to create an MVG in Siebel Too

Page 747: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 747/1241

Lab

In the lab you will:

Create a new MVG

Create an MVG applet to display the MVG

Page 748: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 748/1241

Page 749: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 749/1241

3

Module 33: Data Layer

Configuration

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 750: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 750/1241

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Create extension columns in a table

Create custom tables

Standalone table

1:1 extension table

1:M extension table

Intersection table

Why you need to know:

Enables you to incorporate additional attributes and bu

entities into a Siebel application

Page 751: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 751/1241

Incorporating Additional Data

Your business requirements may include:

 Adding new fields to capture additional data

Creating new business components to capture addition

entities

Extending the Siebel database can satisfy these requ

 Adding one or more columns to an existing table

Creating new database tables to support new business

components

Page 752: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 752/1241

Prior to extending the Siebel database, consider using

Unused Columns in an Existing Table

Existing 1:M Extension Table

Evaluate the Existing Database Tables

Page 753: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 753/1241

Unused Columns in an Existing Table

Consider mapping new fields to unused columns in an

base or 1:1 extension table

Verify that the candidate column has the desired type

Consider possible upgrade conflicts in future releases

Consider performance impact of a join to the 1:1 exten

1:1 extension

table of S_OPTY

Unused columns

Page 754: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 754/1241

Existing 1:M Extension Tables

Consider mapping the new business component to an

appropriate 1:M extension table (as discussed in an e

module)

Verify that the business component has the correct M:1

relationship to the candidate parent business compone

FavoriteRestaurants

Contact

New business

component has M:1

relationship to parent

(Contact)

Page 755: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 755/1241

Extending the Database

Changes the database schema and requires propaga

changes to:

Other developers during development

Mobile users after development for applications in prod

Production enterprise at completion of development an

Requires creating additional object definitions to:

Map columns in the EIM tables needed to import and e

to the extension columns and tables

Specify how data for these extension columns and tabl

routed to remote users (Dock Objects)

Page 756: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 756/1241

Using Siebel Tools to Extend the Database

Supports creating new:

Extension columns on tables

Standalone tables

1:1 extension tables

1:M extension tables

Intersection tables

Creates new object definitions for the database exten

Invokes a wizard to build new tables

Makes the corresponding physical database changes

Developers do not create, use, or maintain SQL scripts

Page 757: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 757/1241

Best Practices for Extending the Siebel Database

General suggestions:

When adding a new column:

If column is not often populated, use an existing column i

extension table if available

If field often populated, avoid join overhead by using addi

extension column to base table

If data for column appears in:

 A form applet, prefer an existing column in an extension t

 A list applet, prefer an extension column in the base table

Join overhead can be significant when displaying many reco

Page 758: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 758/1241

Creating a Custom Extension Column

Make logical changes to the Data layer 

Check out the appropriate project

Select the table to be extended

Create a new column record with the desired propertie

Name automatically prefixed with X_ 

Extensioncolumn

Page 759: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 759/1241

Creating a New Table

Use the Table Wizard to create a new table

Select File > New Object > Table

Four types of table can be created: Standalone table

1:1 extension table

1:M extension table

Intersection table

Page 760: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 760/1241

Creating a Standalone Table

Table wizard creates a standalone table with:

Data (Public) as its type

Nine system columns

One index P1 on ROW_ID

System

columns

Page 761: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 761/1241

Creating a 1:1 Extension Table

Provide a base table as input to the Table Wizard

Choice restricted to the Data (Public) type

Multiple extension tables relate directly to the base tab

to each other 

Page 762: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 762/1241

Creating a 1:1 Extension Table Continued

The Table Wizard creates an extension table with:

Ten system columns

Required nine system columns

PAR_ROW_ID column as the foreign key column to the b

Two indexes:

P1 index on ROW_ID

U1 index on PAR_ROW_ID and CONFLICT_ID

S_PROD_INTR O W _I  D

 NAME

P ART _ N UM

 U OM _ CD

CX_PROD_INT_XR O W _I  D

 NE W  C OL UM N

P AR _R O W _I  D

Page 763: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 763/1241

Creating a 1:M Extension Table

Create if the parent table does not have an existing 1

Provide a parent table as input to the Table Wizard

Choice restricted to the Data (Public) type

Page 764: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 764/1241

Creating a 1:M Extension Table Continued

Table wizard creates an 1:M extension table with:

Data (Public) as its type

Ten system columns

Nine required columns

PAR_ROW_ID column as the foreign key column to the b

TYPE and NAME columns

Three indexes:

P1 index on ROW_ID

U1 index on PAR_ROW_ID, TYPE, NAME, and CONFLIC M1 index on TYPE and NAME

Page 765: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 765/1241

Creating an Intersection Table

Select both parent tables

Choices restricted to the Data (Public) type

Specify the foreign key column name for each parent

Page 766: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 766/1241

Creating an Intersection Table Continued

Table Wizard creates an intersection table with:

Data (Intersection) as its type

Nine system columns

Two foreign key columns as specified

Three indexes:

P1 index on ROW_ID

U1 index on two foreign key columns, TYPE, and CONFL

F1 index on foreign key to second parent table

Page 767: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 767/1241

Applying and Propagating Database Changes

Test changes locally before applying them to the serv

database

Reduces the likelihood of undesired changes to the se

Best practices for changing the schema:

1. Apply Changes to the Local Database

2. Propagate Changes to the Server Database

3. Propagate Changes to Other Developers

Page 768: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 768/1241

1. Apply Changes to Local Database

Click Apply/DDL to make the physical database chan

Choice to apply schema changes or generate DDL scr

Changes are preserved across Siebel application upgr

Compile relevant objects and projects

Test changes locally before checking in to the server 

Query tables/columns using a database SQL utility

New table

Page 769: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 769/1241

2. Propagate Changes to Server Database

Check project into the server 

Copies the table and column object definitions

Does not apply those changes to the server database s

 Apply changes to the server database

To make changes visible, press the Activate button on t

object on the server machine

Compile and test against the server database

 Apply

Server Machine Developer

Workstation

Developer

Workstation

Dev

Work

Page 770: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 770/1241

Check in

3. Propagate Changes to Other Developers

Other developers need to apply changes to their loca

databases

Have other developers Get or check out the project and

changes locally  Alternatively re-extract developers and have them get a

Server Machine Developer

Workstation

Developer

Workstation

Deve

Works

Get/

Check out

Get

Check

Page 771: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 771/1241

Module Highlights

 Alternatives to extending Siebel database schema:

Utilize unused columns in an existing table

Use an existing 1:M extension table if appropriate

Extend the Siebel database in Siebel Tools:

 Add an extension column to an existing table

Use the Table wizard to create a new table:

Standalone

1:1 extension table

1:M extension table

Intersection table

Best practices to modify Siebel database schema:

 Apply changes locally and test

Propagate changes to the server database

Propagate changes to other developers

Page 772: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 772/1241

Lab

In the lab you will:

Create a custom extension column on a table

Check in configuration and apply to the server databas

Page 773: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 773/1241

3

Module 34: Siebel Business

Services

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 774: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 774/1241

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Describe a business service

Describe the structure and role of property sets

Use the business service simulator to test a business s

Why you need to know:

Business services are an important building block for S

workflow

Page 775: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 775/1241

Automating Business Processes

 A business process is a series of activities executed to

a specific business objective

Example: the Quote to Cash business process (how an

creates a quote and converts it to an order for submissi  Automation options within the Siebel application can a

such challenges as:

Maintaining and standardizing consistent business proc

across all business units

Routing and assigning tasks accurately and efficiently

Responding in a timely, effective manner to customer in

service requests

 Assisting users with the implementation of best practice

Offering consistent and personalized service to custom

Page 776: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 776/1241

Siebel Workflow

Is a set of capabilities to extend the functionality of Sie

applications by automating business processes

Includes capabilities such as:

Workflow Processes

 Automates steps in a business process

Workflow Policies

Invokes workflow process under specified conditions

Tasks

Guides users through a series of views to complete a stepprocess

 Assignment Manager 

 Automates assignment of data (such as opportunities and

requests) to the desired people

State Model

Enforces a limited life cycle for select business entities

Page 777: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 777/1241

Page 778: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 778/1241

Prebuilt Business Services

Siebel repository contains many prebuilt business serv

support processing in areas such as

Customer order management

ISS Credit Check Service ISS Shipping Cost Service

ISS Tax Calculation Service

Enterprise application integration

EAI Siebel Adapter 

EAI HTTP Transport

XML document processing

XML Hierarchy Converter 

XML Converter 

Enforcing customer business rules

Business Rule Service

Page 779: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 779/1241

Repository-Stored Business Services

Some business services are stored in the Siebel repos

Siebel-developed business services

 Are written in C++

Cannot be modified by customers Custom business services developed by users

 Are written in Siebel Visual Basic or eScript

 Are created and modified by customers using Siebel Tools

Custom business service

Page 780: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 780/1241

Client-Stored Business Services

Some business services are stored in the client datab

Siebel-developed business services

Custom business services developed by users

Client-stored business services

 Are written in Siebel Visual Basic or eScript

 Are created and modified by customers using the Admi

Business Services screen

 Are never executed if there is a repository-stored busin

of the same name

Page 781: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 781/1241

Methods

 A business service consists of one or more operations

methods

Each method has a set of input and output arguments,

specified type

StringManipulation

Length

Truncate

Concatenate

InputString

String

InputString

String

String1

String

String2

String

OutputString

String

OutputString

String

Length

Number 

Length

Number 

Business service

Input arguments MethodOutput argu

 Argu

Page 782: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 782/1241

Identifying Methods for a Business Service

In Siebel Tools, navigate to Business Service | Busine

Method

Name that appe

client when sele

business service

Page 783: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 783/1241

Identifying Arguments and Types for a Method

In Siebel Tools, navigate to Business Service | Busine

Method | Business Service Method Arg

Page 784: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 784/1241

Invoking a Method

Involves:

 Assigning values to the input parameters

Not all input parameters are required to have values

Retrieving the values assigned to the output parameter

StringManipulation

Length

Truncate

Concatenate

InputString

String

OutputString

String

Length

Number 

Siebel 4 Sieb

Page 785: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 785/1241

Property Set

Is the in-memory data structure used to:

Pass a set of input arguments into a method

Receive a set of output arguments from a method

Output

property

set

Input

property

set   StringManipulation

Length

Truncate

Concatenate

InputString

String

OutputString

String

Length

Number 

Siebel 4 Sieb

Page 786: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 786/1241

Property Set Continued

Represents data using name/value pairs

Has two predefined properties: Type and Value

Has an array for storing user-provided name/value pa

Is automatically created and populated when invoking

business services from a Siebel workflow or task

Type

Value

InputString Sieb

Length   4

Predefined

property

names

Values for predefined

properties

 Array of user-prov

name/value pair

Input property

set

Page 787: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 787/1241

Testing a Business Service

Use the business service simulator in the Siebel Clien

Navigate to Administration - Business Service > Simula

Select the business service and method

Create the property set name/value pairs Optionally load data from an input file

Input property

set

Page 788: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 788/1241

Page 789: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 789/1241

Module Highlights

 A business service is a unit of functionality that is reus

globally accessible

Can be stored in the repository or in user database tabl

Consist of one or more methods Each method is specified by a set of input and output argu

 A property set is an in-memory data structure consisti

name value pairs

 A business service

Is invoked by passing in the input arguments in a prope Returns the output arguments in a property set

Use the business service simulator to test a business

Page 790: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 790/1241

Lab

In the lab you will:

Import a custom business service into the repository

Examine the methods and arguments for a business se

Use the business service simulator to test a business sexamine the output property sets

Page 791: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 791/1241

3

Module 35: Building Siebel

Workflow Processes

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 792: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 792/1241

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

List the types of workflow processes and workflow step

Create a new workflow process and configure business

Siebel operation, and decision steps

Why you need to know:

Siebel workflow processes are one of several declarati

techniques to automate business logic

Page 793: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 793/1241

Workflow Process

Is an ordered set of steps executed in response to a d

of conditions

Is used to automate parts of a business processes in

application

Page 794: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 794/1241

W kfl P St

Page 795: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 795/1241

Workflow Process Steps

Siebel workflow processes consist of different types o

Sub process

step

Decision

point step

Business

service step

User

Start step

End s

eSales – Complete Checkout Process

W kfl P St

Page 796: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 796/1241

Workflow Process Steps Continued

 All workflow processes have a:

Start step

End step

Workflow processes often include the following comm Business service step

Siebel operation step

Decision point step

Start step

End step

Si b l O ti St

Page 797: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 797/1241

Siebel Operation Step

Performs the following operations on a business com

Insert

Update

Delete Query

Next record and previous record operations supported for

over multiple records returned by a query

Queries the Contact

business component

Business Service Step

Page 798: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 798/1241

Business Service Step

Invokes a method of a business service

Invokes the Truncate method of the

StringManipulation business service

Decision Point Step

Page 799: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 799/1241

Decision Point Step

 Allows a workflow to branch to one of multiple steps b

the value of inputs

If input = yes

If inp

Process Properties

Page 800: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 800/1241

Process Properties

Process properties are variables that store inputs use

outputs produced by workflow steps

Each workflow process has a set of process propertie

persist while the workflow process is executing Some are populated when the workflow process is invo

Some return data to invoking workflow process or busi

upon completion

Some of default pro

appear in all wo

Process Properties C ti d

Page 801: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 801/1241

Process Properties Continued

Provide inputs to workflow steps

Receive outputs from workflow steps

Can be used as inputs for following steps

FirstNameLastName

ContactCode

StringManipulation

Length

Truncate

Concatenate

String1

String

String2

String

OutputStrin

String

Businessservice step

Proce

Proper

Configuring a Siebel Workflow

Page 802: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 802/1241

Configuring a Siebel Workflow

1. Create a New Workflow Process

2. Specify the Process Properties

3. Add Workflow Steps

4. Configure the Steps

5. Validate the Workflow Process

1 Create a New Workflow Process

Page 803: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 803/1241

1. Create a New Workflow Process

In Siebel Tools, select the Workflow Process object ty

Create a new workflow process definition

Enter the process name

 Assign the process to a locked project  Assign a business object

Provides context for references to business components

Right-click and select Edit Workflow Process to invok

Workflow Designer 

2 Specify the Process Properties

Page 804: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 804/1241

2. Specify the Process Properties

Select the Process Properties tab in the Multi Value P

Window (MVPW) to display the default process prope

Edit the default set of process properties

 Add new process properties to store additional values used by the workflow steps

Leave the default process properties as is

Default process properties

for all workflows

3 Add Workflow Steps

Page 805: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 805/1241

3. Add Workflow Steps

 Add a start and end step to the designer 

Drag steps from the palette to the workspace

 Add other steps as required

 Add connectors to sequence the steps Make sure that connector ends are anchored (red box

Dynamic connectors (are drawn automawith right angles as necessary)

Connector anchored

4 Configure the Steps (Siebel Operation)

Page 806: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 806/1241

4. Configure the Steps (Siebel Operation)

For each Siebel operation step

Specify the business component and operation

Use the properties window

Specify additional child arguments as required in the M Field names

Search spec input arguments

Output arguments

Business

component

Operation

Fields retrieved

4 Configure the Steps (Business Service)

Page 807: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 807/1241

4. Configure the Steps (Business Service)

For each business service step

Specify the business service name and business servic

Use the Properties window

Business serviceand method

4 Configure the Steps (Business Service) Continued

Page 808: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 808/1241

4. Configure the Steps (Business Service)

For each business service step

Specify inputs to use in the workflow

Select the Input Arguments tab in the MVPW

 Assign a literal value or a process property to each input Specify outputs of the business service step

Select the Output arguments tab in the MVPW

 Assign each output to a process property

Input arguments

defined for method

Constant value

assigned as input

Value of p

assign

Value of output argument

assigned to process property

4. Configure the Steps (Decision Point Step) Contin

Page 809: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 809/1241

4. Configure the Steps (Decision Point Step)

For each decision point step, set conditions on each b

(connector) originating at the step

Select connector 

Right-click and select Edit Conditions

4. Configure the Steps (Decision Point Step)

Page 810: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 810/1241

4. Configure the Steps (Decision Point Step)

Enter the condition criteria for each branch in the Com

Condition Criteria dialog box

Do not create a condition criteria for the default branc

Execution path taken if no other branches are satisfied

Does contact have

a middle name

Page 811: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 811/1241

Additional Workflow Steps

Page 812: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 812/1241

Additional Workflow Steps

Siebel workflows may contain additional types of step

Sub process

Invokes another workflow process as a sub process

User interact Navigates the user a view and waits for user activity

Wait

Pauses the workflow for a specified period of time before

Stop

Stops the workflow process instance if a predefined exce

Task

Invokes a Siebel task (subject of a subsequent module)

Workflow Modes

Page 813: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 813/1241

Workflows are characterized by modes that describe runtime behavior 

Service Flow

Executes a discrete set of steps and completes

Is the default mode for a new workflow Cannot include wait or user interact steps

Interactive flow

Designed to navigate users through a set of views

Is being replaced by Siebel tasks

Long running flow

Is a workflow that is intended to persist for some indetermof time

Can be paused and resumed as an inbox item

Cannot include a wait step

7.0 flows

Provided for backward compatibility of workflows defined

Siebel 7.5 release Should not be used for any new workflows

Module Highlights

Page 814: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 814/1241

g g

 A workflow process is an ordered set of steps execute

response to a defined set of conditions

Is used to automate parts of a business processes in a

application

Siebel workflow processes consist of different types o

(Business service, Siebel operation, decision point, et

Process properties are variables that store inputs use

outputs produced by workflow steps

Build a workflow process by:

Creating a new workflow process

Specifying the process properties

 Adding workflow steps

Configuring each step

Validating the workflow process

Lab

Page 815: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 815/1241

In the lab you will:

Configure a workflow process that includes business se

Configure a workflow process that includes a decision

Page 816: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 816/1241

Page 817: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 817/1241

3

Module 36: Testing and Deploying

Workflow Processes

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Module Objectives

Page 818: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 818/1241

j

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Test a Siebel workflow process using the simulator 

Deploy a Siebel workflow process

Why you need to know:

Workflow processes should be tested to verify that they

desired prior to deployment

Deployment is a critical step in making a new workflow

available for use

Managing Siebel Workflow Processes

Page 819: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 819/1241

Workflow process differ from most other object definit

 Are not compiled into an .srf file

Cannot be archived into .sif files

Can be exported to and imported from XML files

 After a workflow process has been configured in Sieb

Simulate the workflow

Deploy the workflow

Workflow Simulator 

Page 820: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 820/1241

Use the workflow simulator to verify that the workflow

as desired

Workflow simulation is controlled in Siebel Tools

Workflow is actually executed in an instance of a Siebe

Tools and the Siebel client must be connected to a comm

DB

Enabling Workflow Simulation

Page 821: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 821/1241

Configure the connection to the Siebel run-time instan

In Siebel Tools, select View > Options > Debug

Simulator shares the connection parameters used by Too

Specify the run-time Siebel instance

Provide a valid login

Executable: Location of siebel.exe

file for the Mobile Web Client

 Arguments: Use default, opens

communication between Tools and

Mobile Web Client

CFG file: Location of the Mobile

Web Client configuration file

Working directory: The Mobile

Web Client directory

Login information: Login name,password, data source

Test a Workflow Using the Workflow Simulator 

Page 822: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 822/1241

1. Specify the Test Record

2. Start the Simulator 

3. Start the Simulation

4. Execute the Workflow

1. Specify the Test Records

Page 823: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 823/1241

In the Siebel client, create test records to support the

Use About Record to determine the row ID

In Siebel Tools, enter the row ID of the test record as

string for the Object ID process property When the workflow is invoked in production, row ID of

passed in as an input argument

2. Start the Simulator 

Page 824: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 824/1241

Make sure that all instances of the Siebel client applic

closed

Right-click the Workflow Designer workspace and sel

Simulate

Workflow Designer displays the workflow in the simulat

3. Start the Simulation

Page 825: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 825/1241

Click the Start Simulation button in the simulation tool

Use View > Toolbars > Simulation to display the simula

 A new instance of the Siebel client is launched

Wait until Siebel client

application starts and displays

the Workflow Simulator view

Start simulation

4. Execute the Workflow

Page 826: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 826/1241

Execute the workflow in either 

Single step mode using the Simulate Next button

Continuous mode using the Complete Simulation butto

Verify that the workflow branches correctly at decisionSimulate next Complete Simulation

4. Execute the Workflow Continued

Page 827: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 827/1241

Inspect the watch window to verify that process prope

the expected values

Values of user added process properties can be edited

simulation

Inspect process properties

in watch window

4. Execute the Workflow Continued

Page 828: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 828/1241

Complete the simulation

Use either Simulate Next or Complete Simulation butto

Verify that the final values of process properties are c

Click the Stop Simulation button Inspect the client and verify that the desired changes

Stop simulation

Workflow Simulator Considerations

Page 829: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 829/1241

Cannot simulate workflow processes that invoke serv

components

Must test these workflows directly on the Siebel Web C

Cannot simulate workflows with run-time events on st

(discussed in a subsequent module)

Can simulate workflows with user interact steps

Requires the developer to perform the activity in the cli

application to allow the simulation to proceed

Managing Siebel Workflow Processes

Page 830: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 830/1241

 After a workflow process has been configured in Sieb

Simulate the workflow

Deploy the workflow

Deploying Workflow Processes

Page 831: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 831/1241

Transfers the workflow from the repository to run-time

make it available for use

Consists of:

Developer setting the workflow complete in Siebel Too

 Administrator activating the workflow in the run-time cli

Publish the Workflow

Page 832: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 832/1241

In Siebel Tools, click the Publish button in the Workflo

Sets the status to Completed

Prevents any further editing of the workflow process

Makes the workflow available for activation

Publish

Checking in the Workflow Process

Page 833: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 833/1241

In Siebel Tools, check in the completed workflow proc

server repository

Siebel Web Client can now access the workflow

Activating the Workflow

I th Si b l W b Cli t ti t th kfl

Page 834: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 834/1241

In the Siebel Web Client, activate the workflow

Navigate to Business Process - Administration > Workf

Deployment

Select the newly deployed workflow and click Activate

Transfers the workflow definitions in the repository tables

corresponding run-time tables

Publishing/Activating a Workflow Process

D l d l d ti t kfl

Page 835: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 835/1241

Developers can deploy and activate a workflow proce

Siebel Tools to expedite testing of the deployed workf

In Siebel Tools, click the Publish/Activate button in the

toolbar 

Sets the status to Completed

Transfers the workflow definitions in the repository tabl

corresponding run-time tables

Siebel client (for testing) must use the same database as

Publish/Activate

Workflow Monitoring

N i t t B i P Ad i i t ti > W

Page 836: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 836/1241

Navigate to Business Process - Administration > Wor

Deployment

Select the active workflow process

Set the monitoring level in the active workflow process

The value assigned is used whenever the workflow proce

or resumed

Monitoring Level

Monitoring le els can be set as follo s to record diffe

Page 837: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 837/1241

Monitoring levels can be set as follows to record diffe

degrees of detail

Performance can degrade as level of detail recorded in

* In Detail, data is written at the end of the workflow

** In Debug mode, data is written to disk after every step

 All Steps All Steps

 All Steps

None

None

Record StepInstance

YY

Y

Y

N

RecordProcess

Instance

 All Steps All steps

None

None

None

Record ProcessProperties

4-Debug**3-Detail*

2-Progress

1-Status

0-None

Levels

Deployment Considerations

Deploy all child workflows (sub processes) first to ma

Page 838: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 838/1241

Deploy all child workflows (sub processes) first to ma

available to the deployed workflow

Compile any new repository objects referenced in the

workflow such as business components, fields, and v

Revising Workflows

Workflows are versioned

Page 839: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 839/1241

Workflows are versioned

Existing versions are kept and a new version is created

To revise a workflow

In Siebel Tools, select the desired workflow (check out

Click the Revise button in the Workflow toolbar 

Creates a copy of the workflow

Increments the version number 

Sets status to In Progress

Edit and test the workflow

Deploy the workflowRevise

Administering a Revised Workflow

In the Siebel Web Client activate the workflow as bef

Page 840: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 840/1241

In the Siebel Web Client, activate the workflow as bef

Sets the deployment status of the prior version to Outd

 After being activated the new version will be invoked

 Any instances of the prior workflow version running at t

activation run to completion

Module Highlights

Use the workflow simulator to verify that the workflow

Page 841: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 841/1241

Use the workflow simulator to verify that the workflow

as designed

Workflow simulation is controlled in Siebel Tools

Workflow is executed in an instance of a Siebel client

Deploy a workflow to make it available for use in the r

client

In Siebel Tools, publish the workflow

In the run-time client, activate the workflow to make the

available for invocation

Revise a deployed workflow to edit it

This creates a new version

Lab

In the lab you will:

Page 842: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 842/1241

In the lab you will:

Simulate workflows you previously configured

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 843: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 843/1241

3

Module 37: Executing Workflow

Processes

Module Objectives

After completing this module you should be able to:

Page 844: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 844/1241

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Describe the workflow execution architecture

List several ways to invoke workflow

Invoke a workflow process using a run-time event

Invoke a workflow process using a custom control

Why you need to know:

There are multiple ways to invoke a workflow process a

need to understand the choices available

Executing Workflow Processes

Workflow processes are executed either in

Page 845: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 845/1241

Workflow processes are executed either in

The user’s application object manager

Supports synchronous processing

 A separate server component known as the Workflow

Manager component Supports asynchronous processing

In both cases workflow processes are executed using

Workflow Process Manager business service

Is often referred to as the Workflow Engine

Synchronous Workflow Processing

Is typically executed in the user’s application object m

Page 846: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 846/1241

Is typically executed in the user s application object m

User is forced to wait until the workflow completes (or p

Hourglass icon appears

Can be triggered by an action on the part of the user:

Directly by clicking a button or menu item

Indirectly by performing a record or applet operation

Is used to execute specific business logic that:

Is triggered by the user’s activity

Should be completed before the user continues activity

Asynchronous Workflow Processing

Is executed in the Workflow Process Manager server

Page 847: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 847/1241

g

component

User (if any) is not prevented from continuing activity

Is typically triggered by a change in the value of some

a database table

Can respond to changes not associated with user activ

For example: updates resulting from Enterprise Integratio

imports

Can respond to conditions that exist for some threshold

time Is used to execute specific business logic when a spe

condition is satisfied

Will be discussed in the following module

Invoking Workflow Processes

 A workflow process can be invoked by a variety of me

Page 848: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 848/1241

p y y

Run-time events

Custom buttons and menu items

Workflow policies

Programmatically (that is as part of script)

This module

Next module

Beyond scop

Run-Time Events

 Are a mechanism that allows customer-configured pro

Page 849: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 849/1241

g p

be triggered by user activity

Consist of:

 A specification of some user activity such as:

Record being updated

Navigating to/from an applet

The resultant processing

Workflow

One or more calls to business services

Known as an action set

Run-Time Events Continued

Can be defined for three types of objects:

Page 850: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 850/1241

yp j

 Application

Examples: logging in, logging out

 Applet

Examples: displaying an applet, displaying a record

Business component

Examples: Querying, deleting a record, setting a field valu

 Are fired when a user performs the corresponding act

Business Component Events Business component events often come in pairs such

Page 851: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 851/1241

PreDelete/Delete

PreSetField/SetField

PreWriteRecord/WriteRecord

The Pre- event is fired immediately prior to object ma

executing the operation

Example: PreWriteRecord executes customer process

the record is saved

 Allows for possible verification of field values

The other event is fired immediately after the object mexecutes the action

Example: WriteRecord executes customer processing

record is written

 Allows for follow-on processing after a record is saved

Adding a Run-Time Event to a Workflow Process  A run-time event can be added to a workflow process

Page 852: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 852/1241

condition on the connector out of a:

Start step

Used to invoke the workflow

Wait step Used to resume the workflow

User interact step

Used to resume the workflow

 Add run-time

event here

 Add run-time

event here

Invoking a Workflow Using a Run-Time Event

Page 853: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 853/1241

1. Add the Run-Time Event

2. Deploy and Activate the Workflow

3. Reload the Run-Time Events

1. Add the Run-Time Event Create the workflow process as usual

Page 854: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 854/1241

Select the connector to attach a run-time event

Must be a start, wait, or user interact step

In the properties window, specify the triggering event

Caution: A workflow with a run-time event on the start

cannot be tested with the workflow simulator 

Select

connector

Specify the event type,

business component,

and event to monitor

2. Deploy and Activate the Workflow In Siebel Tools, deploy the event

Page 855: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 855/1241

In the Siebel client, activate the event

2. Deploy and Activate the WorkflowContinued

 Activating the event automatically registers the run-tim

d i t d kfl ith th Si b l ti

Page 856: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 856/1241

and associated workflow with the Siebel run-time eve

Creates an action set that invokes the Workflow Proces

Row ID of activated

workflow Business Service,

method to invoke

3. Reload the Run-Time Events Navigate to Administration - Runtime Events > Events

Page 857: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 857/1241

Select Menu > Reload Runtime Events

Updates the run-time event engine with the new run-tim

Not necessary to query for the specific run-time event

Run-time event created by

activating the workflow process

Invoking Workflows Using a Custom Control

User explicitly clicks a custom button or menu item to

kfl

Page 858: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 858/1241

workflow

Configuration involves applet user properties

Custom menu item that

invokes a workflow

Invoking a Workflow Using a Custom Menu Item

Create a command object

S if l f h M h d

Page 859: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 859/1241

Specify a value for the Method property

 Add an applet method menu item to reference the com

Invoking a Workflow Using a Custom Menu Item

 Add a new Applet User property that associates the w

be invoked with the new named method

Page 860: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 860/1241

be invoked with the new named method

Invoke this business

service and method and …

… pass in these pairs

argument names and v

Invoking a Workflow Using a Custom Button

Create a custom control for the button

S if l f th M th d I k d t

Page 861: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 861/1241

Specify a value for the Method Invoked property

 Add a new Applet User property that associates the w

be invoked with the new named method

Create an applet user property specifying the workflow

to execute when the named method is invoked

Specify a

defined nam

Method to

on the co

Invoking a Workflow Process Explicitly

The Workflow Process Manager business service can

referenced explicitly:

Page 862: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 862/1241

referenced explicitly:

In a script

 As parameters in declarative configuration

Developers must specify: The name of the business service and method

The name of the workflow process and other paramete

arguments

Often the RowId parameter must be passed in

Invoking a Workflow Process Explicitly Continued

 A workflow process can also be executed using the b

service simulator

Page 863: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 863/1241

service simulator 

Is an alternative way of testing new workflows

Business service that

executes workflow processes

Provide name of workflo

process as input argume

Module Highlights

Workflow processes are executed in the Workflow Pro

manager in either the application object manager or in

Page 864: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 864/1241

manager in either the application object manager or in

component

Can be executed either synchronously or asynchronou

 A workflow process can be invoked by a variety of me Run-time events

Custom buttons and menu items

Workflow policies

Run-time events are a mechanism that allows custom

configured processing to be triggered by user activity

Lab

In the lab you will:

Invoke a workflow from a custom menu item

Page 865: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 865/1241

Invoke a workflow from a custom menu item

Invoke a workflow using a run-time event

Page 866: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 866/1241

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 867: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 867/1241

3

Module 38: Using Workflow Policies

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Create a workflow policy that invokes a workflow proce

Page 868: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 868/1241

Create a workflow policy that invokes a workflow proce

Workflow Process Manager server component

Enable the workflow policy using workflow server comp

Why you need to know:

Some workflow processes are best executed asynchro

the Siebel server 

Asynchronous Workflow Processing

Some workflows need to be executed asynchronously

They might run for a long time and should not execute

Page 869: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 869/1241

They might run for a long time and should not execute

object manager 

They might need to wait for the invoking condition to be

for some period of time Example: If a critical service request remains unassigned

than two hours, notify the service manager and set the pr

Workflow policies are a mechanism for asynchronous

of workflow processes

Workflow Policies

 A workflow policy is a rule consisting of:

One of more policy conditions

Page 870: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 870/1241

One of more policy conditions

 A policy action

 Action is invoked when all conditions are true

Example: When a service request priority = Critical ANsubstatus = Unassigned:

Send urgent message to service manager 

Conditions:

Substatus = Unassigned

Service Request Priority = Critical

Conditions:

Substatus = Unassigned

Service Request Priority = Critical

Actions:

Update priority to High

Send message to service

Actions:

Update priority to High

Send message to service

IF True… then execute

Workflow

Policy

Workflow

Policy

Workflow Policy Conditions

Policy condition specifies a logical relationship betwee

workflow policy column and a value

Page 871: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 871/1241

p y

 All policy conditions must be satisfied for a condition t

Policy may have a duration specified

Conditions must apply for the duration before the actionexecuted

Conditions:

Status = Open

Service Request Priority = High

Conditions:

Status = Open

Service Request Priority = High

Actions:

Update priority to Very H

Send message to owner 

Actions:

Update priority to Very H

Send message to owner 

IF True for at least two hours … then execute

Workflow

PolicyDuration = 2 hours

Workflow

PolicyDuration = 2 hours

Workflow Policy Actions

 A workflow policy action is the response to be execute

Consists of:

Page 872: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 872/1241

Consists of:

Type of program to be executed

Examples: Run workflow process, send email, send mess

broadcast One or more program-specific arguments

Multiple types of programs are supported

Not restricted to running workflow processes

 Actions are defined separately

Can be used in multiple workflow policies

Workflow Policies

Leverage:

 A separate server component known as the Workflow

Page 873: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 873/1241

p p

Manager component

Is a server component optimized for executing workflows

Behaves like an object manager 

Can access the business and data layers

Does not have a user interface for direct user interaction

Database triggers:

 A trigger is a process or a stored procedure attached to a

table that fires when a specified data modification event o

 Are created by the Generate Triggers server component

Executing Workflow Policies

Generate Triggers creates the database triggers requ

monitor conditions in policies

Page 874: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 874/1241

Workflow Monitor Agent checks for fired triggers

Identifies policy conditions that are satisfied

Invokes the desired workflow process

Workflow Process Manager executes the workflow pr

Execution is asynchronous

Work

Monitor

Server

Request Broker 

Workflow

Process Mgr 

Siebel

Database

Generate Triggers

S_EEnd-user activity or server process

EIM

Create triggers corresponding

to policy conditions Triggers fire when

conditions satisfied

and inserts recordRe

exExecutes the workflow

process specified in action

Page 875: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 875/1241

Prerequisite for Executing Workflow Policies

Enable the Workflow Management component group

enterprise

Page 876: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 876/1241

 Assign and enable the component group on a server 

Navigate to Administration - Server Configuration > En

Component Groups

Workflow Component Definitions

Workflow Component Group consists of six server co

definitions

Page 877: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 877/1241

Page 878: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 878/1241

1. Create a Workflow Group

Navigate to Administration - Business Process > Polic

Create a new policy group

Page 879: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 879/1241

2. Create a Workflow Policy Action

Navigate to Administration - Business Process > Actio

Create a new action

Page 880: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 880/1241

Specify Run Workflow Process

Provide workflow process as an argument

Specify the Run WorkflowProcess program

Specify the workflow

process to invoke

3. Create a Workflow Policy

Navigate to Administration - Business Process > Polic

Create a new policy

Page 881: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 881/1241

Specify conditions

 Add one or more actions

 Associate an action to inv

the workflow process

Create a policy

Create a condition

3. Set Duration

Set duration for the workflow policy

 All conditions must be met and the policy duration mus

satisfied to trigger the workflow policy actions

Page 882: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 882/1241

satisfied to trigger the workflow policy actions

Defaults to 0

The workflow policy actions are triggered as soon as the conditions are met

4. Generate Database Triggers

Run a Generate Triggers batch job to create database

corresponding to the policy conditions

Wh t i fi i t P li C diti

Page 883: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 883/1241

When a trigger fires against a Policy Condition, a recor

in the Escalation Request Table (S_ESCL_REQ)

S_ESCL_REQ contains all the rows in the database thtrigger a policy to take action

Generate Database

Triggers

Record is inserted,

updated, or deletedS_ESCL_

Table upd

4. Generate Database Triggers Continued

Navigate to Administration - Server Management > Jo

Create a new job

Page 884: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 884/1241

Select Generate Triggers

Specify parameters

Submit job

Create new Job andselect Generate Triggers

Specify

parameters

Click Submit Job tostart Component Job

Page 885: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 885/1241

Verify the Workflow Policy

Create a test record (or modify an existing record) tha

the policy condition

Wait for at least the policy duration

Page 886: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 886/1241

Wait for at least the policy duration

Verify that the desired workflow actions are executed

Comparing Different Methods

Use different methods for different needs

Page 887: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 887/1241

YesNo

(runs on Siebel Server)

Runs on

Mobile Client

Syn

(runs in

Synchronous

(runs in user session)

 Asynchronous

(runs in background)

Synchronous

NoInvokes processNot UsedRuntime Event

Not Not RequiredRequiredWF Monitor

 Agent

Not Not RequiredRequiredGenerate

Triggers

Workflow

Policies

Workflow

PoliciesRuntime

Events

Runtime

EventsC

C

Cu

Co

Module Highlights

 A workflow policy is a rule consisting of one or more c

and a policy action to be executed when the condition

satisfied

Page 888: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 888/1241

satisfied

Workflow policies implement asynchronous execution

workflow processes Workflow policies require the use of:

Generate Triggers to create the database triggers

Workflow Monitor Agent to check for fired triggers

Workflow Process Manager to execute the associated

policy

Lab

In the lab you will:

Create a workflow policy

Enable the workflow management group components

Page 889: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 889/1241

Enable the workflow management group components

Test the workflow policy

Page 890: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 890/1241

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 891: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 891/1241

3

Module 39: Siebel Task UI

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Describe the role and benefits of Siebel Task UI

Invoke and complete a task

Page 892: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 892/1241

Invoke and complete a task

Why you need to know: Siebel Task UI provides an alternate style of user intera

assists successful completion of business tasks and inc

automation of activities

Business Challenge

Many tasks require users to perform several steps to c

the task

Users may not be familiar with the sequence of steps

Page 893: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 893/1241

y q p

Users may inadvertently skip a step

Users often require additional training to complete the t

Companies would like to implement a user interaction

assists users in completing such tasks

Business Solution: Siebel Task UI

Uses a wizard-like interface to guide users through ste

task

Consists of a sequenced set of views, each of which co

Page 894: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 894/1241

small set of relevant data from the user 

Extends business process automation to the UI layer 

Users are directed to complete some steps in a task in

prescribed order 

Features of Siebel Task UI

Supports forward and backward navigation through a

of views

 Allows for a set of records to be reviewed and corrected

Page 895: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 895/1241

completion of the task

Supports branching based on user input

Supports pausing and resuming tasks if users are inte

Instance of the partially completed task is saved in the u

Context and all data are maintained

Task is resumed from the Universal Inbox

Supports transfer of paused tasks to other users

Using Task UI

Click the Task button to expose the Task pane

Displays links to tasks that can be invoked in the curren

application context

Page 896: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 896/1241

Task button

Task link

Task

pane

Task group

(a collection

of related

tasks)

Invoking a Task

Click the link for the desired task

 A task view replaces the standard Siebel view

Task pane displays other views in the task to provide co

Page 897: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 897/1241

the overall task

Views may be grouped into chapters

Enter data in fields in the first view

Click Next to proceed to subsequent views

Enter dataTask pane shows current

position in task

Click

to pro

Invoking a Task Continued

Task views are typically characterized by:

Small number of fields in each applet in the view

Each view focuses the user on a specific set of data to edi

Page 898: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 898/1241

 A set of navigation buttons located above and/or below

Known as a Playbar applet

 Absence of navigation options such as view tabs and h

Click

to pr

Playbar applet

Small number ofrelated fields

Task view

Progressing Through a Task

Enter data in each subsequent view

Click Next to proceed

Click Back to return to a previous view to inspect or m

Page 899: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 899/1241

p p

previously entered data

Task views in chapter

are listed as user

navigates to the view

Branching in a Task

Tasks can branch based on data the user inputs

Example: branching based on lead quality of an opportu

Some views may explicitly present to the user a choic

Page 900: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 900/1241

the next step to be executed

Select the desired activity and click Next

User makes a selection

Pausing a Task

Click Pause to suspend task activity

 All data and context is retained

 A link to the paused task is added to the user’s inbox

Page 901: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 901/1241

Navigating outside the task view implicitly pauses a ta

For example clicking a screen tab or the site map butto

Inbox

Resuming a Task

Click the link in the Inbox to resume the task

Task resumes exactly where it was paused

Page 902: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 902/1241

Inbox

Task view

reappears

Page 903: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 903/1241

Persistent Data in Task UI

 All data entered during a task is initially stored in temp

storage managed by the Object Manager 

Is not automatically written to the database as user proc

next view

Page 904: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 904/1241

next view

Persistent data is committed to the database:

When the task completes

 At intermediate points in the task flow if the underlying t

contains explicit commit steps

Records can not be rolled back after being committed

Data created or modified is not available to others unt

committed

Data in temporary storage:

Is maintained while the task is paused

Is cleared only when the task is cancelled or completed

Transient Data in Task UI

Refers to data collected and used during the execution

but not saved afterwards

Example: user choice about the next step

T i t d t b d t i t t d t i

Page 905: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 905/1241

Transient data may be mapped to persistent data in a

in the task

User enters name of a contact to retrieve

If no contact is found, a new contact record is created a

Transient data disappears when the task ends

User’s selection does not

need to be stored persistently

Tas

Tasks and Workflow Processes

 A workflow process can invoke a task

Invokes a task step in the workflow process

 A task can invoke a workflow process

Page 906: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 906/1241

Invokes Workflow Process Manager business service in

Invokes a workflow using event handlers associated wit

button

Tasks and Long-Running Workflow Processes

Initial task can start a long-running workflow upon com

Long-running workflow can assign a task to a user’s in

then go to sleep

U i k th i d t k f th i b d

Page 907: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 907/1241

User can invoke the assigned task from the inbox and

completion will wake up the long-running workflow

Workflow (Business Process )

Views of Expense Report Approver Views of Expense Report Submitter 

CreateExpense

Create Expense Report Task

View End

HomePage

SubmitExpense

Check Limit

(Bus Service )

 Approval

Needed? Yes

View

HomePage

StartWorkflow

Task

StepEnd

No

InboxView

Create/Assign

 Task

 Approve Expense Report Task

View End

Inbox- Task: Approve

  Expense Report

- Task: Approve

  Transfer 

 ApproveExpense

InboxView

ResumeWorkflow

LaunchTask

Launch

Task

Process

Expense Report

Task to create an

expense reportT

an

Workflow initiated

by first task

Workflow m

for second

Comparison of Task UI and the Standard UI

Consider using Task UI for tasks that:

 Are inherently complex

Lengthy, complex sets of inputs, lots of branching

Are performed by novice or infrequent users

Page 908: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 908/1241

 Are performed by novice or infrequent users

Can take advantage of the the ability to pause and tran

Involve transactional processing

Might be integrated with workflows

Consider using the standard UI for tasks that:

 Are simpler 

 Are performed frequently by power users

Do not involve transactional processing

Module Highlights

Siebel Task UI is a wizard-like interface that guides us

through steps in a task

Invoke a task from a link in the task pane

Use the buttons in the Playbar applet to proceed retu

Page 909: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 909/1241

Use the buttons in the Playbar applet to proceed, retu

previous view, pause, or complete the task

Paused tasks are resumed from the user’s inbox

Data collected during a task is not committed to the da

Until the task is completed

Or is explicitly committed at specific points in the task

Lab

In the lab you will:

Execute a task

Page 910: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 910/1241

Page 911: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 911/1241

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Identify the major components of a task

Configure a task

Administer a task

Page 912: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 912/1241

 Administer a task

Why you need to know:

These are the steps to create and deploy a task

Creating a Task

Consists of the following activities:

Configuring several types of Task UI components in Si

Deploying the task to the run-time client

Administering the task in the run-time client

Page 913: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 913/1241

 Administering the task in the run-time client

Components of a Task

Task Flow

Page 914: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 914/1241

Task View

Task Group

Task Flow

Specifies the flow of a task as a sequence of task ste

Examples: Siebel operation, business service, and so o

Includes one or more task view steps that display a vi

user

Page 915: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 915/1241

user 

Is configured in Siebel Tools using the Task Flow Des

Is a visual, declarative editor similar to the workflow de

Task View

Is a special type of view used in a task

Displays data to a user 

 Allows user to enter data

Allows user to navigate using the buttons in the Playba

Page 916: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 916/1241

 Allows user to navigate using the buttons in the Playba

Consists of one or more applets and the Playbar appl

Is invoked in a task view step in a task flow

Task View Continued

Differs from standard views

The view is not displayed in the context of a screen

The user must use buttons in the Playbar applet to nav

Clicking any UI element outside the task view and task pa

Page 917: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 917/1241

g y p

the task and displays the prior standard Siebel view

 Applets in a task view do not have  An applet menu

The standard record controls such as New, Delete, and Q

Page 918: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 918/1241

Configuring a Task

1. Configure the Task Flow

Page 919: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 919/1241

2. Create Applets for Task Views

3. Configure the Task Views

4. Bind the Task Views

5. Configure Remaining Task Steps

6. Assign Chapters

7. Create the Task Group

Configuring a Task Continued

Page 920: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 920/1241

8. Compile the Configured Objects

9. Publish the Task Flow

1. Configure the Task Flow

Use the Task Wizard to create a Task object

Select File > New Object

Select the Task Tab and click the Task icon

Enter fields as below:

Page 921: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 921/1241

Na

in

bu

1. Configure the Task Flow Continued

In the task Designer, add steps as required

Drag connectors and anchor them to the steps

Page 922: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 922/1241

2. Create Applets for Task Views

Use the Form Applet Wizard to create applets that dis

small set of focused data

 Alternatively, copy an existing applet and delete the

unnecessary fields

Page 923: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 923/1241

3. Configure the Task Views

Use the Task View Wizard to create one or more task

View objects with type = Task

Page 924: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 924/1241

3. Configure the Task Views Continued

Select a view Web template

 Assign one or more customized applets

 Add the Playbar applet to the top and/or the bottom o

Page 925: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 925/1241

4. Bind the Task Views

For each task view step in the flow, assign a task view

Right-click the task step and select Bind Task View

Select the view from the list of available views

Set the button properties for the view

Page 926: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 926/1241

Determines which buttons

are disabled in a view

Set to Next for all

but the final view

5. Configure Remaining Task Steps

Configure other types of steps such as:

Siebel Operation

Identify the business component and operation

Set the Defer Write property to TRUE if necessary

D i i P i t t

Page 927: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 927/1241

Decision Point step

Set the conditions on each branch

Prevents Object Manager from

rejecting the record because

some required business

component fields are not

populated

6. Assign Chapters

Optionally, create chapters to group steps in the task

 Assign each step to a chapter 

Page 928: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 928/1241

 Assigned to chapter 2

 Assigned to chapter 1

7. Create the Task Group

 Assign the task to an existing (or new) task group

Groups several tasks in the task pane

 Assign the task group to a view

 Assign to the Task Pane View to make the tasks visible

Page 929: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 929/1241

 Assign task

group to view

 

ap

8. Compile the Configured Objects

Compile the configured objects into the target SRF file

Page 930: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 930/1241

9. Publish the Task Flow

Validate the task flow to identify any possible errors

Right-click and select Validate

Page 931: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 931/1241

9. Publish the Task Flow Continued

Click the Publish button in the Deployment toolbar to task flow

Sets the task flow to complete

Makes it available for activation

Page 932: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 932/1241

Administering a Task

1. Activate the Task Flow

2. Register the Task Flow

Page 933: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 933/1241

2. Register the Task Flow

3. Add Responsibilities

1. Activate the Task Flow

Navigate to Administration - Business Processes > TaDeployment

Select the published task and click Activate

Makes the task available for use in the client

Alternati el p blish/acti ate directl from Siebel Too

Page 934: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 934/1241

 Alternatively, publish/activate directly from Siebel Too

2. Register the Task Flow

Navigate to Application - Administration > Tasks

Create a new record and select the task from the list o

published tasks

Page 935: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 935/1241

3. Add Responsibilities

 Add one or more responsibilities to the registered task

 Allows users with the responsibility to see the task in th

Click Clear Cache to make the task immediately availa

Page 936: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 936/1241

 Adds task to the Siebel

 Administrator responsibility

Testing the Deployment

Click the Tasks button to display the Task pane

Verify that the desired task appears

Click the task link and execute the task

Page 937: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 937/1241

Module Highlights

Creating a task in Siebel Tools consists of:

Configuring a task flow

Creating and binding task view steps

 Assigning steps to chapters

 Adding the task to a task group

Page 938: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 938/1241

g g p

 Assigning the task group to a view Publishing the task to the run-time client

 Administering the task in the run-time client consists o

 Activating the task

Registering the task

 Adding the task to one or more responsibilities

Lab

In the lab you will: Create a task

Deploy and administer the task

Page 939: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 939/1241

Page 940: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 940/1241

Module 41: Transient Business

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 941: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 941/1241

4

Module 41: Transient Business

Components and Branching

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to: Describe the role of transient business components an

applets

Configure branching logic in a task

Page 942: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 942/1241

Why you need to know: Transient business components allow you to incorpora

branching logic into task flows and to manage user dat

mapped immediately to a business component field

User-Entered Data

Is typically persistent Maps immediately to regular business component field

Is written to the database during or at the end of the tas

May be transient

Is entered and then referenced in a subsequent step in

Page 943: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 943/1241

Is entered and then referenced in a subsequent step in

flow Does not need to be stored persistently

Transient Business Component (TBC)

Is used to represent user input and other data that doneed to persist beyond the lifetime of the task

Type is Transient

Has one or more single-value fields

Does not support joins or multi-value fields

Page 944: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 944/1241

Maps to a special table: S_TU_LOG Is based on a special class: CSSBCTaskTransient

Stores one record at most

Is managed by the Object Manager 

Uses for a Transient Business Component

Capture user selections that control the flow of a task Collect data that will be incorporated into persistent d

the task such as:

Postal code or telephone area code

Data that may be conditionally mapped to business com

Page 945: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 945/1241

y y

fields in subsequent task steps Support applets that display data from several busine

components

Example: an applet that needs to show some quote and o

Task Applet

Is a special type of applet used to display and collect data

Maps to a transient business component

Displays data from only that business component

Can be assigned only to a task view

Page 946: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 946/1241

Can appear in a view by itself or with one or more stan

Task Applet

Task Applet Continued

Differs from standard applets Is always a form applet displaying a single record

Must be based on grid Web templates

 Applets do not display an applet title or applet menu

Is based on a specialized class: CSSSWEFrameTask

Page 947: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 947/1241

Task applet

Branching in a Task

Task UI framework supports branching (in a task) basinput

Input can be persistent data such as the account type

Is implemented by configuring a decision point step

Follow the same procedure as in a workflow process

Page 948: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 948/1241

Task flow with

branching

Dec

step f

Branching in a Task Continued

Input can also be transient data, such as the selectionuser makes when presented a choice about the next s

Requires the use of a transient business component

Is implemented by configuring a decision point step

Page 949: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 949/1241

User selection is

transient data

Configuring Branching in a Task Using a TBC

1. Modify the Task Flow

2. Create a Picklist

Page 950: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 950/1241

3. Create the Transient Business Component

4. Create the Task Applet

5. Create the Task View

6. Configure the Decision Point Step

7. Complete the Configuration

1. Modify the Task Flow

 Add a task view step to the flow to allow the user to mchoice

 Add a decision point step to evaluate the user’s choic

 Add connectors to implement the desired business flo

Example of direct branching

Page 951: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 951/1241

Task view to allow

user to make choice

Decision point s

to evaluate cho

 A separate task view for

each user choice

Each branch

corresponds to amember in an LOV

1. Modify the Task Flow Continued

Example of iteration

Page 952: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 952/1241

Decision point step

to evaluate choiceLoop that

adds a note

and then asks

user tochoose again

Each branch corresponds

to a member in an LOV

T

us

2. Create a Picklist

 A picklist is required when the user is presented a set Select an existing picklist if available

 Alternatively create a new picklist

Represent the choices as members of a List Of Values

Configure the PickList object

Page 953: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 953/1241

3. Create the Transient Business Component

Use the Transient BusComp Wizard to create the tranbusiness component

Should use the wizard since it assigns required values

TBC properties

Page 954: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 954/1241

3. Create the Transient Business Component Cont

 Add one or more fields  Assign name, type, and length as required

Do not assign a column

Will be assigned automatically after the record is saved

If required, assign the picklist

Page 955: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 955/1241

Create the single-value field pick map

 Assigned automatically

by Siebel Tools

Provides choic

user select

4. Create the Task Applet

Use the Task Applet Wizard to create the task applet Identify the transient business component

Identify the task in which the applet will be used

Select the TBC field(s) that are to be displayed

Page 956: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 956/1241

4. Create the Task Applet Continued

Inspect the applet in the Web Layout Editor  Wizard assigns a radio button control to all fields

For fields with a picklist, the radio button control:

Displays the members of the underlying list of values (LO

 Allows users to select a value by clicking a radio button

Page 957: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 957/1241

For other fields, manually change the HTML type to thvalue

Reposition and/or resize the label and control for each

Radio butto

control (disp

the member

a LOV)

Control caption,

can be edited to

include instructions

5. Create the Task View

Use the Task View Wizard to create a new task view  Assign zero or more regular applets as required

 Assign the task applet

Selection is restricted to task applets assigned to the task

Select and position the Playbar applet

Page 958: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 958/1241

 Alternatively, add the task applet to an existing task v Drag a Task Applet icon from the Applet pane to an ap

placeholder 

Select the desired task applet

6. Configure the Decision Point Step

Right-click the decision point step Set the name property to a meaningful value

Right-click each connector leading from the decision p

Set the label property to a meaningful value as well

Page 959: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 959/1241

6. Configure the Decision Point Step Continued

Compose the conditions for each connector  Right-click each connector leading from the decision po

and select Edit Conditions

Select TBC, field, and desired value for this branch

Page 960: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 960/1241

TBC

LOV

member 

7. Complete the Configuration

Configure remaining steps (task views, Siebel operation)

For each task view step, bind the corresponding task

Remember to set the Forward Button Type to Next

 Assign each step to a chapter 

Page 961: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 961/1241

Compile all new and modified objects

Test the Modified Task

Validate the task Publish and activate the task

Invoke the task in the client and verify that the task ap

appears and branches as desired

Page 962: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 962/1241

Module Highlights

Tasks may include transient data Data entered by users that does not need to be stored

task completes

 A transient business component is required to store d

entered by a user that is not required after the task co

A t k l t i i d t di l d t t d i t

Page 963: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 963/1241

 A task applet is required to display data stored in a trabusiness component

 A task can include branching based on user entered v

including transient data

Branching requires adding a decision point step to the

Lab

In the lab you will: Extend a task to include branching

Page 964: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 964/1241

Module 42: Siebel Business Rules

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 965: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 965/1241

4

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to: Describe the Siebel Business Rules architecture

Use HaleyAuthority to examine business rules

Why you need to know:

Si b l B i R l id f l t t

Page 966: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 966/1241

Siebel Business Rules provides a powerful way to autobusiness decisions and logic in a Siebel application

Implementing Business Logic in Siebel Applicatio

Can often be done using declarative configuration suc Properties in business components and fields

Example: validation and post-default values

Siebel workflows

Siebel state models

O i ll i t i ti

Page 967: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 967/1241

Occasionally requires custom scripting Can result in:

Business logic that is distributed throughout the applica

Difficult to understand the complete set of implemented log

Business logic that is represented in multiple ways with

syntax

Difficult to modify to meet new requirements

The need to compile and deploy a new Siebel repositor

Business Challenge

Companies want a more unified way to implement buslogic

Centralized store of business rules or logic that can be

modified to incorporate changing business processes

Reviewable by non-implementers such as business ana

Deployable without recompiling the SRF file

All d ti f b i l i t ti

Page 968: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 968/1241

 Allows updating of business logic at run time

Solution: Siebel Business Rules

Provides the ability for companies to create and enforcthat capture their business policies

Rules are expressed in “natural English” rather than a s

SQL statements

Rules can be specified and reviewed by business experts

Rules are centrally developed and administered

R l f d l b ll th h t th Si b l li

Page 969: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 969/1241

Rules are enforced globally throughout the Siebel appli

Uses client-side configuration rather than repository-b

configuration and compilation

 Allows rules to be created, updated, and deployed durin

Page 970: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 970/1241

Siebel Business Rule

Is a conditional or qualified statement about business and characteristics that apply in a business environme

Is written using the rules of English grammar 

if an expense has any expense item which does not have a description

invalidate the expense with "All expense items must have a description

Page 971: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 971/1241

Set “Reimbursable Flag” of an expense item to false

if the expense item’s expense item type is “Personal”

unless the expense item’s description is “Pre-approved”

Qualified rule statement

Conditional rule statement

Concepts

 Are nouns that represent the entities and their charact  Are used to build rule statements

Correspond to business components and fields in the

data model

ConceptConcept (represents a

business component)

Page 972: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 972/1241

if an expense has any expense item which does not have a description

invalidate the expense with "All expense items must have a description

Concept(Field)

Rule statement

business component)

Page 973: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 973/1241

HaleyAuthority

Is a separate third-party application used to examine adevelop Siebel business rules

Is installed as part of a Siebel Tools installation

Is invoked from the Siebel Tools program group

Page 974: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 974/1241

HaleyAuthority Continued

Imports relevant object definitions from the Siebel devrepository

Generates the corresponding Haley concepts

Is used to author the rule statements based on the ge

concepts

Stores concepts and statements in a separate databaf d t k l d b

Page 975: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 975/1241

Stores concepts and statements in a separate databareferred to as a knowledge base

Deploys rules to a set of tables in the Siebel run-time

Run-Time Inference Engine

Is a third-party rules engine used to evaluate and execbusiness rules at run time

Is installed automatically in the Siebel client during a s

client installation

Is accessed by calling the Business Rules Service bus

service

S th i t f t th i f i

Page 976: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 976/1241

Serves as the interface to the inference engine

Can be invoked using:

 An action set in a run-time event

 A business service step in a Siebel workflow or task

 A business service call in a script

Exploring Rules

Use HaleyAuthority to examine rules Click the Modules & Statements tab to display rule state

Page 977: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 977/1241

Structure of Rules

Rules are written using English grammar (“natural Eng  A given rule can be expressed in several ways

Common practice is to create statements followed by

that determine if the statement applies

If: statement applies when at least one if qualifier is true

Unless: statement does not apply when unless qualifier

Only if: statement applies when all only if qualifiers are

Page 978: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 978/1241

Only if: statement applies when all only if qualifiers are

Rule Statements

 A statement can be either a: Statement of fact

Example: An expense report is a valid expense report

Statement of action

Set “Reimbursable Flag” of an expense item to false

Siebel-specific actions consist of three action types

Actions: Produce output or modify data in the Siebel ap

Page 979: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 979/1241

 Actions: Produce output or modify data in the Siebel ap

Set a field value, invalidate with reason

Functions: Return a value from the Siebel application

Get profile attribute, get active view name

Predicates: Return a Boolean value

User in task mode, currency is equal to

Concepts

Click the Concepts tab in HaleyAuthority to display the Entity: Describes entities (things) in the business mode

Value: Describes characteristics of entities in the busine

Page 980: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 980/1241

Siebel Business

Rules uses only

these two types

of concepts

Entities

Expand Entity to display the entities Represent the business components imported from the

repository

Page 981: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 981/1241

Expense and Expense Item

business components

imported for these rules

Value

Expand Value and its children types to display the valu

Represent business component fields imported from the

repository

 Are grouped by the type of the field

Page 982: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 982/1241

Expense and Expense Item

(text) fields imported for these

rules

Expense Item (Boolean) fields

imported for these rules

Phrasings

Consist of short expressions that capture a relationsh

concepts

Typically represent the relationship between a business

component and one of its fields or a child business com

 Are used to build rule statements

Page 983: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 983/1241

Capture relationship between business

component and one of its fields

Capture relationship between parent and child BCs

Concepts in Siebel Business Rules

Concepts are generated automatically using the Siebe

Importer in HaleyAuthority

Entities correspond to Siebel objects

Values correspond to single-value fields of objects

Rules developers must not modify or extend the conce

way

Page 984: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 984/1241

Module Highlights

Siebel Business Rules allows users to create and enfo

that capture business policies

Rules are expressed in natural English

Rules are developed by client-side configuration

Siebel Business Rules consist of:

 Authoring tool accessible from Siebel Tools

A run-time execution engine accessed by calling a busi

Page 985: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 985/1241

 A run time execution engine accessed by calling a busi

service

 A rules module consists of multiple statements based

predefined concepts, actions, functions, and predicate

Concepts correspond to business components and field

Siebel repository

Lab

In the lab you will:

Examine an existing rule

Page 986: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 986/1241

Module 43: Creating Business Rules

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 987: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 987/1241

4

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Create rules using HaleyAuthority

Deploy and administer rules in the Siebel client

Invoke rules in the Siebel client

Why you need to know:

You perform these steps to create business rules

Page 988: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 988/1241

You perform these steps to create business rules

Creating Siebel Business Rules

Concepts are generated in HaleyAuthority

 Are based on object definitions in the Siebel repository

 Are created by invoking the Siebel Object Importer 

Statements are then written based on the concepts

Rules developers must not:

Modify the underlying concepts

Create additional concepts manually

Page 989: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 989/1241

Developing Rules

1. Create a New Knowledge Base

2. Import Siebel Object Definitions

3. Create a Rule Module

Page 990: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 990/1241

4. Deploy the Rule Module

1. Create a New Knowledge Base

Start HaleyAuthority from the Siebel Tools program gr

Select the ODBC connection string for the new knowle

Page 991: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 991/1241

1. Create a New Knowledge Base Continued

Verify that a base set of Haley concepts appears

No entities yet

Page 992: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 992/1241

2. Import Siebel Object Definitions

Invoke the Siebel object importer 

In HaleyAuthority, select File > Import > Siebel Object

Provide the connection information for:

Master repository data source (source of object definitio

Run-time data source (environment where rules will be

Page 993: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 993/1241

Exam

configura

importin

sample re

2. Import Siebel Object Definitions Continued

On the first import for a new knowledge base the follow

occurs immediately:

Object definitions relating to currency and currency cod

imported

Concepts to support Siebel currency calculation proced

created

Siebel-specific actions, functions, and predicates are cr

Page 994: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 994/1241

2. Import Siebel Object Definitions Continued

 After currency-related concepts are created:

Select Import Siebel Objects

Specify the Siebel Business Object

Select the business component and, possibly, child bus

components

For each selected business component, select one or m

Page 995: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 995/1241

Business

and field

the expen

discus

previo

2. Inspect Concepts

Inspect the output window to verify that corresponding

concepts, and phrasings were created

Page 996: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 996/1241

2. Inspect Concepts Continued

In the Concepts tab, expand entity and value

Verify that the entities and values corresponding to the

and fields have been created

Inspect the phrasings

Should be of the form “a <BusComp> has a <Field>” an

equivalents

Page 997: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 997/1241

2. Import Siebel Object Definitions Continued

 Additional import considerations

Entities are used to represent business components

Parent and child business components that are selected e

Business components that are referenced in multi-value fi

Values are used to represent single-

value fields

 Are categorized by the field type Example:

Page 998: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 998/1241

DTYPE_TEXT value: string

DTYPE_PHONE value: string

DTYPE_INTEGER value: number 

Several Siebel field types cannot be

converted

 Are not displayed in the list of

selectable fields

3. Create a Rule Module

 A module is a collection of rule statements that are de

together 

Suggestion:

Create a rule module to contain only the statements that n

evaluated as a set by the rules engine

Name the rule module to indicate how the module will be i

 A module can be divided into submodules to improve

Page 999: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 999/1241

3. Create a Rule Module Continued

Click the Modules & Statement tab

 Add a new module (and submodules if desired)

Module

Submodules

Page 1000: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1000/1241

3. Create a Rule Module Continued

 Add one or more statements

Use the Edit Statement dialog box to enter the stateme

Text is bolded if it can be parsed, that is if the words enter

correspond to defined concepts and phrases

 A list of eligible words is presented at all times

Page 1001: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1001/1241

Enter text

 Allowable

words based

on phrasings

3. Create a Rule Module Continued

 Add applicability conditions to specify when the statem

Edit statements until all content parses

Page 1002: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1002/1241

Right-click

 Applicability toselect condition

4. Deploy the Rule Module

Invoke the Siebel Deployer 

In HaleyAuthority select Tools > Siebel Deployment

Verify the connection parameters for the run-time data s

Select the modules to deploy and click OK

Page 1003: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1003/1241

Administer Deployed Rules

In the Siebel client, navigate to Administration - Busin

> Rule Modules List

Select the deployed rule module

Specify the business object that will provide data to th

rules engine

Should be the business object specified for object impo

Page 1004: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1004/1241

Administer Deployed Rules Continued

Create one or more Rule Module Relation records

They identify the business components necessary to ev

rules

Click New and select the records that specify the pare

relationships captured in the rules

Page 1005: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1005/1241

Activate Rules

Click the Activate button in the Rule Modules list apple

the status to active

Only active rules are evaluated by the rules engine

Status changes

Page 1006: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1006/1241

to Active

Invoking the Rules Engine

The rules engine is accessed by calling the Business

Service business service Can be invoked using an action set for a run-time event

Page 1007: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1007/1241

Creating a Run-Time Event Action Set

In the Siebel client, navigate to Administration - Runtim

> Action Sets

Create a new action set, and a child action of BusServ

Action set

Page 1008: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1008/1241

 Action set

 Action for the action set

Creating a Run-Time Event Action Set Continued

In the More Info applet

Specify Business Rule Service and RunRules as the bu

service name and method

Specify the rule module name as the context

Page 1009: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1009/1241

Creating a Run-Time Event Action Set Continued

Navigate to Administration - Runtime Events > Events

Create an event record for the business component

Specify the desired run-time event

 Assign the action set

Select Reload Runtime Events from the applet menu

Page 1010: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1010/1241

 Action set Run-time event

Test the Rule Module

Create a record and trigger the run-time event

Verify that the desired business logic is executed

Create additional records as required to fully test the r

Page 1011: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1011/1241

Additional Ways to Invoke the Rules Engine

The business rules service can be invoked:

In custom scripts

In business service steps in Siebel workflows and tasks

Page 1012: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1012/1241

Invokes rules

engine to determine

the lead quality

Module Highlights

Create rules by:

Creating concepts by importing business components afrom the Siebel repository

Building statements based on the concepts

Deploy the rules module to the Siebel run-time client

 Activate the rules in the client

Invoke the rules by using a run-time event Configure an action set

Page 1013: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1013/1241

g

Lab

In the lab you will:

Create a new rule

Import a set of Siebel objects

Create the rule module

Deploy and administer the module

Create an action set triggered by a run-time event

Page 1014: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1014/1241

4

Module 44: Introducing Siebel

Assignment Manager 

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 1015: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1015/1241

4

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Explain the role of Siebel Assignment Manager 

List the elements used to create rules that assign busin

Why you need to know:

Your company may have rules and policies about how

data that can be automated using Siebel Assignment M

Page 1016: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1016/1241

Business Challenge

Companies need to assign business data in a timely f

in a way that consistently follows their business rules policies

Sales leads

Contacts

 Accounts

Service requests

Typical characteristics

Page 1017: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1017/1241

Large volumes of data

Short response times

Multiple rules and policies

Complex Conflicting

Business Solution: Siebel Assignment Manager 

 Allows companies to automatically assign business d

most appropriate positions, people, and organizations Consists of:

 Administrative functionality to define assignment rules

Server components to automatically assign business d

according to the rules

Page 1018: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1018/1241

Assignment Rules

 Assignment Manager uses assignment rules to assign

Rules assign one or more candidates to assignment obon one or more criteria

EmployeesPositions

Organizatio

Accounts

CampaignsService Requests

Product Defects

 Assignment Objects

C

Page 1019: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1019/1241

Organizatio

Skills

ExpertiseAvailability

Product

Workload

Sales Territory

Product Defects

Opportunities

Activities

Criteria

Page 1020: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1020/1241

Assignment Candidates

Candidates are instances of entities to which data can

assigned Position

Employee

Organization

Examples of candidates for pre-configured objects:

 Accounts can be assigned to both positions and organ

 Activities can be assigned to employees

Page 1021: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1021/1241

Service Requests can be assigned to both employees

organizations

Types of candidates must be consistent with the allow

control mechanisms for the object

Assignment Criteria

Criteria express conditions that must be satisfied for d

assigned  Are expressed in terms of attributes of objects and/or c

Examples:

 Account State = CA

 Account Product = a product that candidate has expertise

Rules often include multiple criteria

Page 1022: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1022/1241

Administering Assignment Rules

Rules are created and administered using the Siebel

 Are not part of the Siebel repository

 Are not compiled into the .srf file

Can be deployed during run time

Page 1023: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1023/1241

Examples of Assignment Rules

 Assign Accounts by Sales Region

 Assign Service Requests to Skilled Agents

Page 1024: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1024/1241

Assign Accounts by Sales Region

 ABC Company assigns accounts to its sales organiza

 ABC Company also assigns accounts to its sales repsregion

Opportunities in the Western Region (CA, OR, WA) are

to Sales Rep – West

Opportunities in the Eastern Region (CT, MA, ME, NH,

assigned to Sales Rep – East

ABC Sales Organization

Page 1025: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1025/1241

VP Sales - US

Pat

Sales Rep – West

 Alex

Sales Rep – East

Jane

ABC Sales Organization

Rule to Assign Accounts by Sales Region

Rule includes

Candidates (desired organization and positions)

Criteria for determining region to assign the account

Object: Account

Candidates: Sales Rep – East

Sales Organization

Rule: Assign East Accounts

Position candidate

Organization candidate

Page 1026: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1026/1241

Criteria: Account State is one of

CT,MA,ME,NH,RI,VT

Rule applies when

Rule to Assign Accounts by Sales Region Continued

 A separate rule is required for each sales region

Object: Account

Criteria Acco nt State is o

Candidates:

Sales Rep – East

Sales Organization

Rule: Assign East Acco

Object: Account

Criteria Acco nt State is one of

Candidates:

Sales Rep – West

Sales Organization

Rule: Assign West Accounts

Page 1027: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1027/1241

Criteria: Account State is o

CT,MA,ME,NH,RI,VT

Criteria: Account State is one of

CA,OR,WA

This rule applies when This rule applies when

Candidates for Rules

Two assignment rule records are created

Candidates are listed in the Position Candidates view

Page 1028: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1028/1241

Criteria for Rules

 Applicable states are listed in the Criteria view

Page 1029: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1029/1241

Assign Service Request to Skilled Agents

VP Service

XYZ company assigns service requests to employees

correct skills to resolve them Skills are properties that reflect the candidate’s abilities

areas such as:

Product expertise

Installation and upgrade skills

LanguagesService Organization

Page 1030: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1030/1241

Chris

(no skill)

Service Agent 1

Craig

(Network)

Service Agent 2

Ellen

(CPUs)

Service Ag

Jack

(Power sup

Assign Service Request to Skilled Agents Continued

Rule includes

Criteria for assigning request Employee skill matches the area of the service request

Candidates to be considered

Can list select employees or consider all available employ

Object: Service Request

Candidates:

Rule: Assign Service Request

Employee candidates

Page 1031: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1031/1241

Criteria: Candidate’s product skill =

product associated with Service

Request

 All service agentsEmployee candidates

Rule applies when

Running Assignment Manager 

 Assignment Manager can be invoked in three modes

Batch Assignment: Can be used to submit batches of dtime assignment or reassignment

Dynamic Assignment: Automatically invokes Assignme

to assign data in near real time as records are created

Interactive Assignment: Can be used to manually assig

candidates in real time

Enabled for Service Request and Activity assignment obj

Page 1032: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1032/1241

Module Highlights

Siebel Assignment Manager allows companies to auto

assign business data to the most appropriate positionand organizations

 Assignment rules are used to assign candidates to ob

Include assignment objects, candidates, and criteria

Page 1033: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1033/1241

Page 1034: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1034/1241

4

Module 45: Creating Assignment

Rules

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 1035: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1035/1241

4

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Create an assignment rule that assigns sales data to a Create an assignment rule that assigns service data to

employee

Test assignment rules

Why you need to know:  Assignment Manager uses rules to assign data to cand

Page 1036: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1036/1241

Assignment Rules

 Assign one or more candidates to assignments object

on one or more criteria  Are specified using several key concepts

How to pick the assigneefrom the qualified candidates

Who to consider

as candidates

Page 1037: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1037/1241

Captures the criteria

aspect of the rule

Creating Assignment Rules

General process to create assignment rules:

Design the rule Create the rule record

Define the criteria

Specify the candidates

Page 1038: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1038/1241

Page 1039: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1039/1241

1. Design the Assignment Rules

Determine the criteria to identify each sales region

Example: Sales regions are based on account state East region includes MA, VT, NH, ME, RI, CT

Determine the candidates to be assigned in each sale

Sales Rep - East

Sales Mgr - East

East (CT, MA, ME, NH, RI, VT)

PositionsRegion

Page 1040: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1040/1241

Sales Rep - West 1 Sales

Rep - West 2

West (CA, OR, WA)

Page 1041: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1041/1241

3. Specify the Criteria

Drill down on the rule

In the Criteria view, create a new Rule Criterion to be assign data

Example: Only opportunities with an account state in th

region will be assigned

Specify the Comparison Method

Specify the attribute value(s) to be used in the compa

Page 1042: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1042/1241

Compares Account

State to the list below

4. Specify the Candidates

Navigate to the Position Candidates view

 Add a new record for each position to be assigned Optionally assign organizations using the Organizatio

Candidates view

Page 1043: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1043/1241

Specify one or

more positions

Example: Assigning Service Data to Employees

1. Design the Assignment Rule

2. Create the Rule

3. Specify the Criteria

4. Specify the Candidates

Page 1044: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1044/1241

5. Associate Skills with Candidates

1. Design the Assignment Rule

Determine the criteria to assign a candidate to a servi

Matching criteria include: Skill match

Location

 Availability

Workload

Determine the set of eligible candidates

 Alternatively consider all available employees

Obj t S i R t

Page 1045: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1045/1241

Object: Service Request

Criteria: Candidate’s product skill =

product associated with service

request

Candidates:

 All service agents

2. Create the Rule

Navigate to Administration - Assignment > Assignmen

List Select the assignment object

Set Person Candidate Source to All People

Set Assignee Filter to One, Best Fit 

 Assign a rule group

C

Page 1046: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1046/1241

 A

on

e

3. Specify the Criteria

Drill down on the rule

In the Criteria view, create a new rule criterion to be uassign data

Example: Consider employees only if they are skilled in

product associated with the SR

Specify the comparison method

Page 1047: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1047/1241

Qualify only employees

with product skill

4. Specify the Candidates

When considering a restricted set of candidates for as

set Person Candidate Source = From Rule Navigate to the Employee Candidates view

 Add a new record for each employee to be considered

Otherwise set Person Candidate Source = All People

Do not explicitly add any employees to rule

Page 1048: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1048/1241

Do not add any employees

5. Associate Skills with Candidates

Navigate to Administration - User > Employees Assig

Skills Skills are employees attributes that can be used in ass

Select a skill and assign one or more values that appl

user 

Page 1049: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1049/1241

Specific skills in the area

 Areas of expertise

Overview of Key Concepts

Person Candidate Source

Comparison Method

Scoring

 Assignee Filter 

Page 1050: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1050/1241

Person Candidate Source

Determines the set of possible candidates that can be

to data by this rule

Consider only employees/positions l

explicitly as a candidate in the rule

From Rule

 All People

Candidate Source

Consider every employee/position as

candidate

Action

Page 1051: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1051/1241

Team Name Consider the members of a team as

candidates

Implements dynamic assignment

Comparison Method

Determines how a rule is evaluated

Expressed in terms of object and candidate attributes

Checks if a person attribute matchesvalue specified in a rule

Compare to Person

Compare Object to

Person

Compare to Object

Comparison Method

Checks if a record attribute matches

value specified in rule

Checks if a record attribute matches

attribute of an employee or position

Action

Page 1052: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1052/1241

Checks if an organization attribute

matches a value specified in a rule

Compare to

Organization

Compare Object to

Organization

Person

Checks if record attribute matches t

attribute of an organization candidat

attribute of an employee or position

candidate

Page 1053: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1053/1241

Page 1054: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1054/1241

Testing Assignment Rules

1. Release Assignment Rules

2. Enable Detailed Logging

3. Run a Batch Assignment

4. Examine the Assigned Records

 After creating a rule, run Batch Assignment to test the

Page 1055: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1055/1241

5. Inspect the Assignment Log Files

1. Release Assignment Rules

In the Assignment Rules List view:

Verify that the rule has not expired

Click Release to update the list of rules used by Assign

Manager 

 A rule must be released again every time it is modified

Page 1056: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1056/1241

 All rules are activeand are released

2. Enable Detailed Logging

Navigate to Administration - Server Configuration > S

Components Select Batch Assignment

Set Log Level for Object Assignment and Rules Evalua

Log levels can range from 0 to 5 in order of increasing de

Page 1057: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1057/1241

3. Run a Batch Assignment

Navigate to Administration - Server Management > Jo

Create a Batch Assignment job and submit the reques

Page 1058: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1058/1241

Specify assignment

object for this job

4. Examine the Assigned Records

Navigate to the list view for the data assigned

Inspect the records and verify that the desired assignwere made

Page 1059: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1059/1241

Has e

this

5. Inspect the Assignment Log Files

Navigate to the Siebel Server log directory to locate th

generated by the Batch Assignment job

Detailed log files document:

How each rule is evaluated and why it failed or passed

Whether the candidates from each passed rule qualify

How the assignees are determined from the list of qualifie

Page 1060: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1060/1241

Module Highlights

General process to create assignment rules:

Design the rule

Create the rule record

Define the criteria

Specify the candidates

Test assignment rules by:

Releasing the rule

Running a batch assignment

Examining the assignment records

Inspecting the assignment log files

Page 1061: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1061/1241

Inspecting the assignment log files

Enable an appropriate level of detailed logging

Lab

In the lab you will:

Create assignment rules

Test the rules

Page 1062: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1062/1241

4

Module 46: Tailoring Assignment

Manager Behavior 

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 1063: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1063/1241

4

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Describe the steps in the assignment methodology Prioritize rules using exclusive rules and rule group seq

Modify the behavior of an assignment object

Why you need to know:

Developing effective rules requires an understanding oassignments rules can be tailored

Page 1064: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1064/1241

Assignment Methodology

Refers to the steps followed by Assignment Manager

candidates to objects

Simplified representation (does not contain all steps)

Identify rules that apply

Identify a list of qualified candidates for the applicable r

Determine primary assignee and assign candidates

For more details, consult the Assignment Methodologin the Siebel Assignment Manager Administrative Gui

Page 1065: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1065/1241

Identify Rules That Apply

 Assignment Manager evaluates all rules that apply to

Eliminates rules that fail the Compare to Object criteria

Example: Value of Required field determines if rule qualif

Multiple rules may survive

Page 1066: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1066/1241

 Always: Rule qualifies if and only if State = CA, OR,or WA

Never: Rule qualifies regardless of stateWhen Available: Rule qualifies if state not specified or State = CA

Identify Qualified Candidates

For each rule that passes, Assignment Manager gene

of qualified candidates

Evaluates the candidates specified in the rule using cri

Compare to Person/Organization

Compare Object to Person/Organization

Scores each candidate

 Applies the Assignee Filter 

Page 1067: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1067/1241

Determines how to

process qualifying

candidates for the rule

Score Candidates

Scores can be defined for many parameters:

To rank the best candidate from a groCandidate

To rank criteria from the most importa

least important

Criteria

Criteria values

 Assignment rule

Item Scored

To apply the score to the candidate’s

when the candidate meets the rule cr

To rank criteria values from the most

the least important

Action

Page 1068: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1068/1241

To rank the best candidate from a gro

qualified candidates

Candidate

Workload distribution To distribute workload across all candThe higher the candidate’s current workload is,

his/her score is

Score Candidates Continued

 A candidate’s score is the sum of the individual score

Candidate total score = 40 …

Page 1069: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1069/1241

Candidate total score = 35 …

… so both c

qualify as e

exceeds the p

Assign Candidates

 Assignment Manager:

Generates assignments using the Assignees Filter from

with the highest scoring assignee

For team-based assignment, the highest-scoring qualif

candidate from the highest-scoring rule is made primar

Rule may optionally identify the primary explicitly

Page 1070: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1070/1241

Will be assigned as primary (total s

Workload Distribution

Is used to distribute work among qualified candidates

Prevents individuals from being overloaded with work

Consists of:

Workload Distribution Rule

Maximum Workload

Score

Page 1071: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1071/1241

Service Scenario

Business Rule: Assign service requests to agents bas

product skill and current workload

 Assign incoming service requests …

… to the appropriate candidate

Page 1072: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1072/1241

Employee: Ellen

Skill: CPU

Workload: 10 SRs

Employee: Craig

Skill: Network

Workload: 18 SRs

Employee:

Skill: Netw

Workload: 2

Workload Distribution Rules

Balance workload across candidates

 Assign a computed score to candidates based on:

Maximum Workload: the maximum number of service r

that a candidate should own at any time

Score: the weight assigned to workload in comparison

criteria

Page 1073: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1073/1241

Calculating Scores for the Scenario

Employee: El

Skill: CPU

Workload: 10

Employee: Cr

Skill: Networ

Workload: 18

Employee: Ja

Skill: Networ

Workload: 20

Service Request

Product = Network

 Assign incoming network

service request to Craig

Compute a workload score and add it to other scores

 Assign a score for product skill

Page 1074: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1074/1241

Employee Product

Score

Employee Workload Score

Score * [1 - (Current Workload / Max LoadCraig 20 45 * [1 – (18 / 20)] = 4.5

Ellen 0 45 * [1 – (10 / 20)] = 22.5

Jack 20 45 * [1 – (20 / 20)] = 0

Craig

assign

Rule Prioritization

Multiple assignment rules may exist for the same ass

object

Can result in qualified candidates from both rules being

Business policies may require that candidates from on

rule be assigned

Assign Opportunities based onAccount State to the state sales

office

Page 1075: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1075/1241

Assign Opportunities based on

Account Industry to only theindustry specialistsOnly positions from this

rule should be assigned

Exclusive Rules

Rules can be marked exclusive to prioritize them

Results in only the qualified candidates from that rule b

assigned

 All rules are first evaluated and scored as before

Exclusive rule must first pass and have qualifying cand

Page 1076: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1076/1241

Set flag to make

rule exclusive

Multiple Exclusive Rules

When several exclusive rules have qualifying candida

rule with the highest scoring candidate prevails

Keep qualifying assignees from only that rule

When two or more exclusive rules tie for highest scor

the rules prevail

Only the default candidate is assigned

Design exclusive rules carefully to avoid such behavior

Page 1077: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1077/1241

Sequencing Rules

Rules within a rule group can be sequenced to prioriti

 A rule group is a named collection (or subset) of assign

 A rule can appear in one and only one group

Rules not explicitly assigned to a group belong automatic

Default Rule Group

Defines ru

Page 1078: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1078/1241

Rule Sequence

Specifies the order in which Assignment Manager eva

rules in a group

Rules with the same sequence number are evaluated i

unspecified order 

Rules with no sequence number are considered to hav

sequence number of 0

Page 1079: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1079/1241

Rule Sequence Continued

 Assignment Manager pauses after evaluating rules w

sequence number 

Stops if an assignment can be made

Otherwise, continues to rules with next higher sequenc

Permit hierarchical assignment strategies

For example:

 Assign opportunity first to a qualifying local office

If not, then to a district office

If not, then to a regional office

If not, then to headquarters

Page 1080: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1080/1241

Run-Time Behavior of Assignment Manager

Is determined by the Assignment object definition

Is located in the repository

Is configured individually for each assignment object

Page 1081: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1081/1241

70 plus properties

Assignment Mode

Specifies how candidates are assigned when a rule a

both positions and organizations

 Assign positions and

organizations independently

 Assign only positions/opairs that both q

 Assign organizatio

consider only correspo

Page 1082: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1082/1241

 Assign positions first and consideronly corresponding organizations

Default Candidate

Is a predefined position/employee who is assigned in

following situations:

Conflict between two rules with same score

 Assigns candidates for both rules and assigns the default

the team

Makes default candidate the primary for team-based assi

Conflict between two exclusive rules with the same sco

 Assigns default candidate to the team as primary Rules do not identify any candidates to assign

 Assigns default candidate to the team as primary

Page 1083: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1083/1241

Default Candidate Continued

Is specified as properties of the Assignment Object de

Default Employee

Default Group

Default Org

Default Position

Page 1084: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1084/1241

Keep Creator 

If this property is set to TRUE, Assignment Manager k

creator of the record on the team regardless of which

Assign

 positions/employees

to dataAssign

 positions/employees

to data

Keep creator

Page 1085: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1085/1241

Keep creator

on team

Configuring Assignment Manager Objects

Use Siebel Tools to edit object definitions to modify th

of Assignment Manager 

Same as editing other object definitions

Page 1086: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1086/1241

Assignment Manager 

Reads Assignment object from repository tables (not

repository file) at run time

No need to compile the Assignment object itself 

Can deploy a modified Assignment object at run time

Page 1087: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1087/1241

Module Highlights

 Assignment methodology refers to the steps followed

 Assignment Manager to assign candidates to objects

Identify rules that apply

Identify a list of qualified candidates for the applicable r

Scoring candidates

Determine primary assignee and assign candidates

Workload rules can be used to distribute work among

candidates

Multiple assignment rules may exist for the same ass

object

Rules can be prioritized by

Page 1088: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1088/1241

Marking a rule as exclusive

Sequencing rules

Run-time behavior of Assignment Manager is specifie

configuration of the assignment object

Lab

In the lab you will:

Create prioritized rules

Modify the run-time behavior of Assignment Manager 

Page 1089: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1089/1241

Page 1090: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1090/1241

4

Module 47: Invoking Siebel

Assignment Manager 

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 1091: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1091/1241

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

List the modes in which Assignment Manager can be in

Invoke Assignment Manager in dynamic mode

Why you need to know:

You need to enable your Siebel environment to suppor

assignment management

Page 1092: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1092/1241

Running Assignment Manager 

 Assignment Manager is invoked in three modes:

Batch Assignment

Dynamic Assignment

Interactive Assignment

 All modes require that the Assignment Manager comp

group be enabled

Page 1093: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1093/1241

Batch Assignment

Is used to submit batches of data for one-time assign

reassignment

Is implemented via a server task

Business scenarios:

Change assignment rules and reassign existing objects

already assigned

Sales region or territory realignment

Existing assignments are inaccurate

 After a batch data load

Page 1094: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1094/1241

Dynamic Assignment

 Automatically invokes Assignment Manager to assign

near real time as records are created or modified

Business scenarios:

Whenever a service request is created, assign it to a se

with the appropriate product skill

Whenever an opportunity is created, assign it to the sa

representative who handles that territory

Page 1095: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1095/1241

Dynamic Assignment Continued

Is implemented using:

 Assignment policies

Generate Triggers

Workflow Monitor Agent

 Assignment Manager 

Is similar to workflow policies

Both execute asynchronously on the server 

Page 1096: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1096/1241

Assignment Policies

Specify which objects are to be assigned

 Are expired by default

Navigate to Site Map > Administration – Assignment >

Policies

Remove the expiration date to activate policies

Page 1097: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1097/1241

Generate Triggers

Is a server task that creates database triggers

Builds triggers for all active assignment policies

Must be run after policies are activated

Page 1098: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1098/1241

Requires a user with privileges

to add triggers to the database

Workflow Monitor Agent

Start Workflow Monitor Agent and specify:

Group Name (the group of assignment policies you act

Sleep Time (interval in seconds between iterations)

Follow steps used in enabling workflow policies

Page 1099: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1099/1241

Assignment Manager 

Is invoked by Workflow Monitor Agent

 Assignment Manager server component must be online

Performs the assignment of data to candidates

Page 1100: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1100/1241

Dynamic Assignment Process Flow

Is similar to the flow for workflow policies

Wor

Monito

Server

Request Broker

Assignment

Manager

Siebel

Database

Generate triggers

Create triggers corresponding

to assignment policies Triggers fire when

conditions satisfied

and write record

 Account created

S_

Makes

assignments

Page 1101: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1101/1241

Monitors S_ESC

for changes an Assignment

Evaluate the

assignment rules

Interactive Assignment

Is used to assign candidates in real time

Enabled for Service Request and Activity assignment o

Business scenarios:

 A customer service representative receives a call and c

new service request, then clicks Assign to find the right

work on that service request

 A field service supervisor wants to find the right person

a repair activity, and uses Interactive Assignment to obpeople with the right skills to perform the repair 

Page 1102: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1102/1241

Using Interactive Assignment

Implemented via user interaction and tasks on server

User makes assignment from a generated list of candid

1. Select the work

to be assigned

2. Click Menu and

select Assign

Page 1103: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1103/1241

3. Select employee and click Assign

Requirements for Interactive Assignment

Verify that Assignment Manager is online and Server

Broker is running

Performs Assignment

Page 1104: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1104/1241

Brokers client requests

Module Highlights

 Assignment Manager is invoked in three modes

Batch Assignment: Is used to submit batches of data fo

assignment or reassignment Is implemented by submitting a job request

Dynamic Assignment: Is used to assign data in near re

records are created or modified

Is implemented using:

 Assignment policies

Generate Triggers

Workflow Monitor Agent

 Assignment Manager 

Interactive Assignment: Is used to assign candidates in

Is implemented via user interaction and tasks on server 

Page 1105: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1105/1241

Lab

In the lab you will:

Create new service records and verify that they are dyn

assigned to the desired employee

Page 1106: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1106/1241

4

Module 48: State Models

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 1107: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1107/1241

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Describe how state models can enforce business logic

Create a new state model

Why you need to know:

 A state model is a simple declarative way to enforce bu

that involves changes to values of certain fields in a bu

component

Page 1108: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1108/1241

Business Entities and Life Cycles

Many business entities have a defined life cycle desc

 A set of states named by the values of one of the entity

 A set of allowed transitions between the states

For example: A service request could have a life cycle

terms of these values of the status field:

Open, Pending, Closed, Cancelled

ClosedPendingOpen

 Arrow indicates a permitted transition

State

Page 1109: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1109/1241

Cancelled

Page 1110: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1110/1241

Business Solution

 A state model captures and enforces such restrictions

transitions

Uses a set of rules and conditions that specify allowed Uses declarative configuration as opposed to script

Is implemented in the Siebel client and not Siebel Tools

Does not involve compiling and deploying a new SRF file

Page 1111: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1111/1241

State Model

 A state model consists of:

 A set of states corresponding to the values of a single-

Must have a bounded picklist declared in the List Of Valu

State field

Page 1112: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1112/1241

States for this state model

State Model Continued

 A state model also consists of:

 A set of allowed transitions that can be restricted

Only can be executed by authorized positions Only can be executed when a condition is satisfied

Unr

Page 1113: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1113/1241

Condit

Only selected positions

allowed to make transition

Enabling Siebel State Model

Only a small number of business components are ena

state model in the as-delivered application

Indicated by a business component user property (Stat Other business components can be enabled for state

Business component class is restricted to CSSBCBase

Page 1114: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1114/1241

Creating a State Model

1. Define the Desired Life Cycle

2. Create a New State Model

3. Specify the Allowed States

4. Specify the Allowed Transitions and Restrictions

5. Specify Authorized Positions

Page 1115: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1115/1241

6. Test the State Model

1. Define the Desired Life Cycle

Review relevant business policies to identify restricted

transitions

Document the allowed transitions and corresponding

Closed

Cancelled

PendingOpen

Permitted only if

severity <> critical

Permitted only by

call center manager Owner must

be assigned

Page 1116: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1116/1241

2. Create a New State Model

Navigate to Administration - Application > State Mode

Create a new state model record

Specify the business component and “state” field

Page 1117: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1117/1241

3. Specify the Allowed States

Navigate to the States view

Create a record for each allowable value of the “state

Specify one state as the default initial state in which neare created

Page 1118: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1118/1241

Set by default

4. Specify the Allowed Transitions and Condition

Navigate to the Transitions view

Create a record for each allowable transition

Select the from and to states using the drop-down list Indicate if there are restrictions on who can execute the

Specify any conditions to be satisfied before transition

3. Deselect

Public if

4

additio

on

Page 1119: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1119/1241

1. Select the

from state

2. Select

the to state

Public if 

transitionrestricted

5. Specify Authorized Positions

For any transitions not marked Public, specify the pos

are permitted to execute the transition in the Authorize

Positions applet

Transition

restricted

Page 1120: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1120/1241

Specify po

to make th

6. Test the State Model

Make sure the state model activation and expiration d

valid

Only one state model based on a given field can be actgiven time

Create one or more test records and verify that the bu

policy is correctly implemented

New state model is effective when a new application ob

manager process starts

New process reads the updated state model cache

Page 1121: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1121/1241

Module Highlights

 A state model restricts the life cycle of a business com

Defines a set of states and allowed transitions between

State models:  Are built in the Siebel client using declarative configura

Do not require recompiling the .srf file

Transitions between states can be restricted as follow

Not allowed at all

 Allowed under only certain conditions  Allowed by only certain positions

 A few as-delivered business components are enabled

model

Customers can enable others for state model if the bus

Page 1122: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1122/1241

component class is CSSBCBase

Lab

In the lab you will:

Create and test a state model

Page 1123: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1123/1241

Page 1124: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1124/1241

4

Module 49: Introducing Enterprise

Integration Manager 

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 1125: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1125/1241

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you will be able to:

Describe the features of Enterprise Integration Manage

Describe how EIM supports referential integrity Describe why direct SQL statements must not be used

user data

Why you need to know:

EIM enables you to properly import external data into thdatabase

Page 1126: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1126/1241

Enterprise Integration Manager (EIM)

Business Challenge: To exchange large volumes of d

between an external application and the Siebel datab

Implementation project challenge: To perform an initial for a Siebel application

Business Solution: Enterprise Integration Manager (E

Is a server component that moves large volumes of da

mode between Siebel interface tables and Siebel base

Interface tables act as a staging area for external data

External

Database

Siebel Database

SiebelInterface Tables

EIM

SQL Utility

Page 1127: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1127/1241

SiebelBase Tables

User Data

The Siebel database contains several types of data:

Seed data: application data populated during product in

Repository data: metadata initialized at installation andduring application configuration

User data: user-supplied data, such as account records

price lists, or assignment rules

EIM is only used to move user data

Siebel Database

Seed

data

Repository

data

Page 1128: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1128/1241

User-supplied data such asaccount information,

contacts, or price listsUser data

Populating and Managing User Data

Use the client application to enter, update, or delete s

amounts of user data directly in the base tables

Use EIM to: Import large amounts of data from external source

through interface tables

Delete large amounts of data

Page 1129: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1129/1241

Siebel Database

Components of EIM

Important components of EIM are:

Non-Siebel

loading tool

Base Tables

Interface Tables

EIM Server Component

EIM Configuration File

Page 1130: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1130/1241

Basetable

Interfacetable

Prepared andcleansed

external data

ServercomponentSi

c

Base Tables

User data is stored in one or more base tables in the

database

Relationships between base tables (referential integrityprimary keys (PKs) and foreign keys (FKs) based on R

ROW_ID is the system primary key for every base table

ROW_ID is a system-generated value

PK FKPK

FK

Page 1131: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1131/1241

S_ORG_EXT S_ADDR_ORS_BU

Interface Tables

Interface tables store external data inside the Siebel d

Staging area for data to be imported, updated, or merg

base tables by EIM

Staging area for data exported by EIM

Staging area for data to be deleted in the base table by

EIM_ACCOUNT

S

Interface Tables

External

database

EIM Server

Component

Page 1132: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1132/1241

External data

Base Tables

Interface Tables Continued

 Are meant to represent typical business “entities”

Typically map to multiple Siebel base tables

 Are denormalized Example: EIM_ACCOUNT interface table maps to eigh

tables

Page 1133: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1133/1241

EIM Server Component

Manages the exchange of data between interface tab

user data in base tables

Belongs to Enterprise Application Integration (EAI) cogroupS_O

S_ADD

EIM_ACCOUNT

EIM Server

Component

Page 1134: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1134/1241

External data

EIM Configuration File

EIM server component reads a configuration file (.ifb)

determine:

Whether data should be imported, merged, deleted, or

Which interface table(s) and base table(s) are used and

Import, merge,

delete, or export

EIM Server

Component

Configu

file (

Page 1135: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1135/1241

User Keys

Based on multiple columns, user keys are used to un

identify a row for EIM

Primary and foreign keys based on ROW_ID are usedsystem-wide referential integrity

ROW_ID NAME LOC BU_ID

User KeyPK FK

Page 1136: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1136/1241

S_ORG_EXT S_BU

Referential Integrity

User key column mappings in interface tables are use

resolve ROW_IDs for base tables, maintaining referen

integrity

PK (ROW_ID)

 Acme

1-8D

User key

1-8DInterface Table

FK (ROW_ID)

Page 1137: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1137/1241

Base Tables

SQL

You must not use SQL to populate user data in base

Relationships between tables are complex

Referential integrity is maintained programmatically thrROW_IDs, not using constraints on the database

SQL statements cannot generate Siebel ROW_IDs

FKPK

S ORG EXT S ADDR ORG

SQL

Page 1138: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1138/1241

S_ORG_EXT S_ADDR_ORG

Module Highlights

Enterprise Integration Manager (EIM) is a server com

that supports bulk imports and exports to and from a S

database

Useful for initial data loads

The main components of EIM are:

Base tables

Interface tables

EIM server component

EIM configuration files (.ifb)

You must not insert user data into Siebel base tables

SQL!

Page 1139: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1139/1241

Page 1140: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1140/1241

5

Module 50: Creating Data Maps

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 1141: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1141/1241

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Determine correct interface (EIM) tables and columns to

import data into and delete data from Siebel base tables

columns

Document data mappings between EIM tables and Siebe

tables

Why you need to know:

Enables you to construct a strategy for successfully impointo and deleting data from the Siebel database

Page 1142: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1142/1241

Data Mapping

The first step in using EIM to import external data is d

mapping

Data mapping determines:1. Which Siebel base table columns will store external so

2. Which interface (EIM) table columns will be used to im

source to destination

Source

(external)

1. Decide

where data

ends up

2. Determine

how to geth

Page 1143: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1143/1241

Interface

(EIM) table

how to getthere

Source Data

 Analyze external source data

Decide which attributes to store

Determine which entity the collection of attributes repre

 Analyze relationships between entities

Customer 

Decision

Maker 

Sales

Person

Name...

Name

Name...

Entity

 Attribute

M:M

M:M

Page 1144: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1144/1241

Name...

Siebel Destination

 Analyze Siebel destination tables and columns

Start with applets and fields used, and work down to bu

layer 

Use Siebel Tools to view tables and columns, business

components (BCs), and relationships

Contact

Position Account

Table

BC

Page 1145: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1145/1241

Identify and Verify Destination Tables and Colum

1. Determine Destination Applet

2. Identify BC Fields

3. Map BC Field to Database Column

Page 1146: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1146/1241

1. Determine Destination Applet

Use the Siebel client to identify applets and controls w

external data is to be displayed

Determine applet and business component names

Example: Verify mapping for Main Phone # field of an

Data to appear in Account Entry Applet

Desired

destinationapplet

BC Name

Page 1147: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1147/1241

Control to map

2. Identify BC Fields

Use Siebel Tools to map the applet control to the BC

Locate controlin Web Layout

view

Propertieswindow displays

field name

Page 1148: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1148/1241

3. Map BC Field to Database Column

Examine BC field properties in Siebel Tools to determ

Siebel base table and column it maps to

Table and

column

BC fieldbeing

mapped

Page 1149: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1149/1241

Map Source to Siebel Destination

Specify the source mapping to the Siebel destination

Identify business component mapped to external entity

Determine Siebel base tables and columns that will sto

attributes

 Account

Contact

Positio

Customer  SalesPerson

Name... Name...

Decision

Maker 

External

entity

BC Table

 Attribute

Page 1150: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1150/1241

Name...

Document Mappings

Document mappings between source and base so tha

everyone has a common understanding

EIM and configuration tasks are often performed by diff

people

Can reduce need to re-do tasks if team members leave

Address

Phone

Name

Source

AttributeEIM Table

Customer 

Customer 

Source

Entity

ZIPS_ADDR_ORG

CITS_ADDR_ORG

ADS_ADDR_ORG

MAS_ORG_EXT

NAS_ORG_EXT

BBase TableEIM Column

Page 1151: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1151/1241

How to Get There: Determine Interface Tables

 After verifying and documenting the source-to-base m

determine and document EIM-to-base mappings

?

Address

Phone

Name

SourceAttribute

EIM Table

Customer 

Customer 

SourceEntity

ZIPS_ADDR_ORG

CITS_ADDR_ORG

ADDS_ADDR_ORG

MAS_ORG_EXT

NAMS_ORG_EXT

BBase TableEIM Column

How to

get there?SourceDe

Page 1152: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1152/1241

Interface (EIM) ?

Table Relationships

 An interface table may populate more than one base

 A base table may be populated by more than one inte

EIM_ADDR_ORG

S_ORG_EXT

S_ADDR_ORG

EIM_ACCOUNT

Page 1153: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1153/1241

Locate EIM Tables

Locate candidate EIM tables using Siebel Tools

Example: Locate EIM tables that populate S_ORG_EX

Query

Result

Flat tab

EIM tables that

populate S_ORG_EXT

Page 1154: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1154/1241

Note: Use EIM_ tables, not _IF tables

Interface Table Documentation

Mappings from interface tables to base tables are doc

by:

EIM Interface Table report available in Siebel Tools

EIM Table Mapping objects

Less convenient than using report

Query for interface

table and…

…select Reports > EIM I

Page 1155: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1155/1241

Page 1156: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1156/1241

Interface Table Documentation Continued

The EIM Interface Table report shows mapping from a

EIM table to one or more Siebel base tables

EIM column (source) to base table column (destination

Column attributes (user keys, foreign key tables, requir

Base column

Base table

EIM column

EIM table

name

Base table

D i

Page 1157: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1157/1241

Destina

column at

Select EIM Table

Select the EIM table that best maps to the target base

and columns

Pick the EIM table that maps the most columns that yo

migrate

Example:

EIM_ACCOUNT can be used to map Account-related P

data because it maps to the intersection table S_ACCN

S_ACCNT_POSTN

columns mapped by

EIM_ACCOUNT

Page 1158: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1158/1241

EIM to Base Mappings

Determine EIM columns that populate target base col

Determine other EIM required columns to populate th

base table

Other columns may be required based on required field

base table

EIMtable

Batab

EIM

columnBase

column

Page 1159: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1159/1241

Determine EIM Columns

Determine which EIM column populates the target ba

in Siebel Tools

Example: MAIN_PH_NUM on EIM_ACCOUNT populat

MAIN_PH_NUM on S_ORG_EXT

co

Base

column

Page 1160: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1160/1241

Determine EIM Columns Continued

 Alternate method is to query Attribute Mappings in Sie

to determine which EIM column populates the base co

Example: MAIN_PH_NUM on EIM_ACCOUNT populat

MAIN_PH_NUM on S_ORG_EXT

Base table

and column

EIM table and column

Result

Q

Use Flat tab

to query

Page 1161: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1161/1241

Determine Base Required Columns

Determine required base table columns that do not ha

defaults (EIM does not recognize non-system default

Defau

recognize

Query Column

Result = required

base columns

Page 1162: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1162/1241

Mapping Considerations

Understand how to enter organization data

Fill in _BU column with name of the organization

Leave _BI column blank

Populated with foreign key during import processing

Understand additional columns that must be populated for

business components

Use EIM Interface Table report to identify these

Examples:

PARTY_UID PARTY_TYPE_CD

ROOT_PARTY_FLG

Page 1163: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1163/1241

Mapping Considerations Continued

Be aware of access control and data visibility issues

Set access control by:

Importing ownership information, or 

Using assignment manager

If ownership is not set or is set incorrectly, data visibility

incorrect

Example:

Import product information to Siebel database

Product visibility is determined by organization

Map product and ownership information to EIM_PROD_IN

interface table)

Be sure to map from EIM_PROD_INT to both S_PROD_I

product base table) and S_PROD_INT_BU (Product/BU i

table)

Mapping documented in EIM Interface Table report

Page 1164: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1164/1241

Module Highlights

Data mapping specifies:

Which base tables and columns will hold external data

Which interface tables and columns will be used by EIM

movement

Steps to create data mappings for EIM:

Map external entities to Siebel business-layer objects

Use the Siebel Web Client to identify and verify mapping

attributes to BC fields

Select the interface table used by the mapping Use Siebel Tools’ EIM Interface Table report to perform c

column mappings between interface tables and base tab

Map all external attributes of interest plus required non-s

columns

Data mappings should be clearly documented

Page 1165: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1165/1241

Lab

In the lab you will:

Map external solutions data to EIM tables and base tab

Map external product data to EIM tables and base table

Page 1166: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1166/1241

5

Module 51: Running Enterprise

Integration Manager 

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Page 1167: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1167/1241

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Populate interface (EIM) tables for imports

Modify configuration (.ifb) files for imports

Invoke an Enterprise Integration Manager (EIM) server ta

Modify configuration (.ifb) files to optimize imports

Why you need to know:

To successfully import external data into the Siebel datab

Page 1168: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1168/1241

 All interface tables have three required columns:

IF_ROW_BATCH_NUM and ROW_ID are set by the u

uniquely designate a record

IF_ROW_STAT is used by EIM to return status after an

Interface Table Structure

2

1

2

1

Row_ID

IMPORTED

IMPORTED

IMPORTED

IMPORTED

IF_ROW_STAT

200

200

100

100

IF_ROW_BATCH_NUM

Toner Ca

Shredder

Fax Mach

Photocop

NA

If import job is successful, system sets

value to IMPORTED

Number to identify all

records that should be

processed in the batch

Unique number to

identify the record

in the batch

Non-null ch

value that i

during th

Page 1169: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1169/1241

value to IMPORTED

Running an EIM Task for Data Imports

2. Determine Processing Order 

3. Run an EIM Task

4. Verify EIM Task Results

1. Populate EIM Tables

5. Remove Data from EIM Tables

Page 1170: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1170/1241

1. Populate EIM Tables

Populate source data into EIM tables using a non-Sie

process

Use database vendor utilities to load data from flat files

Use SELECT INTO to pull data from other SQL databa

Use direct SQL insert, update, or delete statements to

columns in EIM tables

Use SQL queries to verify that EIM tables populated co

EIM_PR

External

data

Non-Siebel

process

Page 1171: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1171/1241

2. Determine Processing Order 

Determine the correct processing order for EIM tables

When importing, tables referenced via foreign key mus

loaded first

Refer to the default.ifb for recommended processing or

Order of imports

Page 1172: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1172/1241

3. Run an EIM Task

Creates an operating system (OS) process that reads

file, loads the dictionary, executes EIM steps, and wri

entries

.ifb

Log

EIM Server

Component

Dictionary

Page 1173: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1173/1241

Direct the execution of an EIM task using a configurat

file

Specifies the batch, order, and type of processing

Use default.ifb as a template

3. Run an EIM Task Continued

Section

IF_ROW_BATCH_NUM

value (rows to process)

EIM table

Default column

values

Page 1174: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1174/1241

3. Turn Off Transaction Logging

Siebel Remote logs transactions to allow synchroniza

mobile clients

Transaction logging reduces EIM performance

Before initial loads, turn off logging

Navigate to Administration – Siebel Remote > Remote Sy

Preferences

 After initial loads, turn on logging to support mobile clie

Turning off transaction logging in a running production sy

require subsequent re-extraction of all mobile user databa

L

du

Page 1175: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1175/1241

3. Create and Run an EIM Job

Navigate to Administration - Server Management > Jo

1. Create a new job and

select EnterpriseIntegration Manager 

2. Specify job

parameters, including

EIM configuration file

3. Click Submit Job

Page 1176: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1176/1241

3. Monitor the EIM Task

Navigate to Administration - Server Management > Ta

Query to view progress

Review Task Information Log Log d

diaginformatio

task pa

Page 1177: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1177/1241

4. Verify EIM Results

Run SQL SELECT statements to verify the table data

Select from EIM table

Select from ba

Page 1178: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1178/1241

4. Verify EIM Results Continued

 After import, IF_ROW_STAT will contain a value that

the status of each imported row

IF_ROW_STAT Value

IMPORTED

PARTIALLY_IMPORTED

REQUIRED_COLS

DUP_RECORD_EXISTS

FOREIGN_KEY

PICKLIST_VALUES

Description

Success for all destination tables

Success for target base table; failur

secondary table

Failed because required column haNULL value

Failed because target table has row

with same values

Failed because a required foreign k

could not be resolved

Failed because required picklist val

found in S_LST_OF_VAL

Page 1179: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1179/1241

4. Verify EIM Results Continued

Verify imported data in the application using appropria

Example: Products > Internal Product List

Verify that products were

imported successfully

Page 1180: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1180/1241

4. Verify EIM Results Continued

Find EIM task number 

Examine task log file

For troubleshooting:

Navigate to Administration – Server Management > Tas

Find task number for EIM task

Examine log file in Siebel server log directory

Page 1181: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1181/1241

4. Verify EIM Results Continued

Job parameters can override component-level event l

create additional information in the log

Trace Flags = 1

Records processing steps SQL Trace Flags = 8

Records summary SQL

Should only be done in test

environment

Dramatically impedes EIM

performance and generateslarge log file

Error Flags = 1

Records details regarding

failed rows

EIM logging

flags used for

troubleshooting

Page 1182: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1182/1241

Remove Data from EIM Tables

You are responsible for removing records from the EI

Use SQL to delete EIM table records once they have b

successfully processed

Page 1183: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1183/1241

Additional Configuration (.ifb) Parameters

Use enhanced configuration parameters to speed EIM

processing and reduce elapsed time:

Process Options

Import Options

Primaries

Page 1184: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1184/1241

Process Options

Explicitly include or exclude tables and columns to av

unnecessary processing

Use ONLY BASE TABLES, ONLY BASE COLUMNS

or  Use IGNORE BASE TABLES, IGNORE BASE COLUM

Example:

Directs task to process o

these target tables

Page 1185: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1185/1241

Process Options Continued

Set options to control processing and enhance perfor

Set USING SYNONYMS to FALSE to avoid unnecessa

processing

USING SYNONYMS applies to accounts only Use SHELL to process multiple EIM tables/sections in

run

Example:

Directs task to

ignore account

synonyms

Page 1186: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1186/1241

Import Options

Set options to preprocess EIM rows and columns

Use FILTER QUERY to select a subset of EIM rows fo

processing

Use DEFAULT COLUMN or FIXED COLUMN to set vaEIM columns

Example:

EIM column,

operator, and value

Page 1187: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1187/1241

Primaries

Improve performance by eliminating sub-queries whe

displaying data from parent and child tables

If primaries are not used, a new query needs to be ex

identify any child records each time a parent record is Two types of Primary settings:

Explicit Primary

Implicit Primary

Page 1188: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1188/1241

S_ORG_EXT

ROW_ID NAME PR_ADDR_ID

1-WEZ Acme 2-AB4

S_ADDR_ORG

OU_ID ROW_ID ADDR

1-WEZ 2-AB8 Elm Street

1-WEZ 2-AB4 Main Street

EIM_ACCOUNT

NAME ADDR_ADDR ADDR_CITY ACC_PR_ADD

Acme Elm Street Boston

Acme Main Street Fremont YSet t

to

EIM table

Base tables

Set Primaries: Explicit Primaries

Use the Primary flag to set explicit primaries through

Use when the external system knows which child shou

primaryEIM t

Columns

S t P i i I li it P i i

Page 1189: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1189/1241

Set Primaries: Implicit Primaries

 Allow EIM to implicitly set primaries

Use when the external system does not know the prima

Sets the primary to be the child with the lowest ROW_I

Mimics auto primary in the application

S_ORG_EXT

ROW_ID NAME PR_ADDR_ID

1-WEZ Acme 2-AB8

S_ADDR_ORG

OU_ID ROW_ID ADDR

1-WEZ 2-AB8 Elm Street

1-WEZ 2-AB4 Main Street

EIM_ACCOUNT

NAME ADDR_ADDR ADDR_CITY

Acme Elm Street Boston

Acme Main Street Fremont

EIM table

Base table

Columns

U i EIM ith D t b M difi ti

Page 1190: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1190/1241

Using EIM with Database Modifications

To populate base table extension columns through EI

 Add an extension column to the EIM table

Map the EIM column to the base column

Test the mapping by running EIM on the server  Use the Interface Table Mapping Wizard

EIMtable

Batab

EIM

Extension

Column

Base

Extension

Column

U i EIM ith D t b M difi ti

Page 1191: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1191/1241

Using EIM with Database Modifications Continued

Update EIM table mappings to include columns or tab

have added using the Interface Table Mapping Wizar

Select the table in Tools, right-click, select EIM Table

Mapping… and complete the wizard

M d l Hi hli ht

Page 1192: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1192/1241

Module Highlights

 All EIM tables have three special columns:

IF_ROW_BATCH_NUM

ROW_ID

IF_ROW_STAT EIM import steps are:

Populate EIM tables

Create an EIM configuration file (.ifb)

Run an EIM job

Verify job results Remove EIM table records

Parameters that can speed EIM processing:

No transaction logging

Process and import options in .ifb file

Can set primaries during EIM import

Lab

Page 1193: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1193/1241

Lab

In the lab you will:

Load solutions data into the interface table

Import solutions data from the interface table to base ta

Load company data into the interface table and import base table

Page 1194: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1194/1241

5

Module 52: Introducing Application

Deployment Manager 

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Module Objectives

Page 1195: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1195/1241

Module Objectives

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Describe the Application Deployment Manager (ADM)

Describe how deployment options are configured

Why you need to know:

 ADM provides a framework to deploy application custo

efficiently and predictably

Business Challenge: Application Migration

Page 1196: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1196/1241

Business Challenge: Application Migration

Deploying a customized Siebel application typically in

 A development enterprise (a collection of Siebel server

customizations are created

 A QA/test enterprise used to test application functional One or more production enterprises that require tested

software

May involve many production Siebel enterprises

The migration of customizations may be very complex

May involve hundreds of customizations

Source and target enterprises may have different config

Development enterprise may be simpler than test enterpr

Customizations may have dependencies on each other

Example: A new state model needs to be deployed after t

business component object definition the model uses

Development and testing often occur concurrently

Business Solution: Application Deployment Man

Page 1197: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1197/1241

Business Solution: Application Deployment Man

Is a framework for deploying application customizatio

target Siebel enterprise

Is designed to provide an extensible facility for quick,

reproducible deployment of a wide range of customiza Includes support for many data types

Supports deployments ranging from a small patch with

handful of application modifications to a major release

SRF file

 Allows creation of reusable deployment packages that

applied to multiple target enterprises

Types of Customization

Page 1198: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1198/1241

Types of Customization

 ADM recognizes three types of application customiza

Database customizations

Repository customizations

File customizations The steps to export and deploy each type differ 

Database Customizations

Page 1199: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1199/1241

Database Customizations

 Are changes to administrative and master data record

Siebel database

Does not include repository table changes

Use EIM to migrate application records, such as AccouContacts, Opportunities

 ADM supports deployment of many data types, includ

Lists of Values (LOVs)

User Lists

 Assignment Rules

 Access Groups

Repository Customizations

Page 1200: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1200/1241

Repository Customizations

 Are changes to object definitions made in Siebel Tool

New or modified

repository objects

File Customizations

Page 1201: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1201/1241

File Customizations

 Are files modified as part of application configuration

Examples:

Web Template files (.swt)

Image and Cascading Style Sheet (CSS) files Siebel Repository file (.srf)

Reports files

Example: image

files

ADM Architecture

Page 1202: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1202/1241

ADM Architecture

The three major parts of the ADM architecture are the

Source enterprise

Orchestration environment

Destination enterprise(s) (can be multiple targets)

Orch

Env

DestinationEnterprise

Source

Enterprise

Deployment

Package

Deployment

package

Source Enterprise

Page 1203: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1203/1241

Source Enterprise

Is the Siebel enterprise containing modifications to be

Example: a development enterprise

Source enterprise components related to ADM includ

Siebel client and Siebel Tools functions to export custo  A packager utility to bundle application customizations

Orc

Env

Destination

Enterprise

Source

Enterprise

Orchestration Environment

Page 1204: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1204/1241

Orchestration Environment

Is a system used to execute ADM deployment

Orchestration environment components include:

The Siebel Management Server 

 A database containing records on all deployments andcontained in ADM packages

 An ADM command line interface (CLI)

 An ADM registry file

 A target enterprise profile file, which describes the targ

environment and deployment steps

Deployment

package

Com

i

Orchestration

Environment

Orchestration Environment Continued

Page 1205: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1205/1241

Orchestration Environment

Siebel Management Server is a service that supports

The ADM orchestration environment

The Diagnostic Tool, which allows performance measu

Siebel servers

Siebel Management Server

is the primary component of

 ADM orchestration

environment

Orchestration Environment Continued

Page 1206: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1206/1241

Orchestration Environment

The enterprise profile file:

Specifies target enterprise parameters

Is used to configure deployment options

Is discussed later in this module The ADM registry file:

Lists data types supported by ADM

Defines ADM operations for each data type

Defines deployment validation rules

Is usually not modified

 ADM reg

file

Destination Enterprise

Page 1207: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1207/1241

Destination Enterprise

Is the target for deployment using ADM

Example: a QA/test Siebel enterprise

Can be multiple destination enterprises

Orch

Env

Destination

Enterprise

Source

Enterprise

Destination Enterprise Continued

Page 1208: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1208/1241

p

Destination enterprise components for ADM include:

 A Siebel Management Agent for each Siebel Server in

enterprise

 ADM server components on each Siebel Server 

Siebel Management Agent is a service that runs in co

with a Siebel Server and provides support for Manage

Server requests

Siebel

ManagementServer 

Siebel Mgmt

Agent

Siebel Server 

Siebel Mgmt

Agent

Siebel Server 

Siebel Mgmt

Agent

Siebel Server 

Orchestration

Environment

ADM Enterprise Profile File

Page 1209: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1209/1241

p

The enterprise profile file contains:

Parameters that specify target enterprise configuration

Parameters that control deployment orchestration

Parameters that describe target enterprise configurati Siebel Server connect string(s)

Siebel Management Agent name(s) and port number(s

Enterprisfile ope

Microsoft

ADM Enterprise Profile File Continued

Page 1210: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1210/1241

p

Complex deployments can be customized by setting p

to control:

Deployment sequence (some deployment units have

dependencies)

Example: A modified assignment object may need to be d

before a new assignment rule

Serial versus parallel deployment

 ADM supports parallel deployment of file and database ty

customizations

Staging Specifies deployment groupings by deployment unit or gr

Siebel server, or a collection of servers

Stop on error 

Sets behavior of deployment on error

Module Highlights

Page 1211: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1211/1241

g g

 ADM may be used to move Siebel application modific

from a development environment to a test environmen

Database changes (LOVs, assignment rules, and so on

Repository changes (objects definitions, workflows, and

Files changes (Web templates, CSS files, .srf files, and

The ADM architecture includes components on:

Source environment

Orchestration environment

Target environment

 Advanced deployment options are set by modifying th

enterprise profile file EntProfile_<EnterpriseName>.xm

Page 1212: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1212/1241

5

Module 53: Deploying Application

Customizations

Siebel 8.0 Essentials

Module Objectives

Page 1213: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1213/1241

j

 After completing this module you should be able to:

Use the packager utility to bundle application customiz

Deploy a package using the ADM command-line interfa

Why you need to know:

 ADM provides a framework to deploy application custo

efficiently and predictably

Steps in Using ADM

Page 1214: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1214/1241

Identify All Customizations to Deploy

Export Database Customizations

Export Repository Customizations

Move File Customizations

Create an ADM Package

Deploy the Package

Identify All Customizations to Deploy

Page 1215: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1215/1241

The first step in planning the deployment of applicatio

customizations is to identify changes

Examination of software configuration management or

development logs may suffice

Identify repository customizations within Siebel Tools

Use Tools > Compare Objects to compare objects and

Generate a mid-level release (covered later in this mod

Identify database changes using the Siebel client or

development logs

Determine file changes using operating system (OS)

timestamps or third-party tools like diff 

Identify All Customizations to Deploy Continued

Page 1216: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1216/1241

 Analyze data dependencies to ensure successful dep

Some ADM supported data types (parent types) are de

other data (child types)

Deploy parent types after child types

Examples:

User List depends on Users

 Access Group depends on User Lists

State Model depends on List of Values

Specify the order of deployment before exporting data

changes using the Siebel client (covered later in this m

Export Database Customizations

Page 1217: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1217/1241

Use the Siebel Web Client to export database modific

files suitable for ADM packaging

Example: Export a collection of new User Lists

Exported files include:  A file containing the exported data (XML)

 A descriptor file (XML)

 A log file giving export details and status

To export database changes:

Create and enable a deployment project

Specify data dependencies

Create and deploy a deployment session

Export Database Customizations Continued

Page 1218: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1218/1241

Navigate to Application Deployment Manager > Deplo

Projects

Create, specify, and enable a deployment project

 A deployment project is a specification of data to deplo

1. Specify Name

and Export to File

2. Specify Data

Type Name

4.Enable

3. Speci

filter to

e

Export Database Customizations Continued

Page 1219: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1219/1241

Use a deployment filter to limit the records to be expo

Save a query that selects the records to be exported

Example: Save a query that selects User Lists with Name

In the ADM Deployment Projects view, enter saved que

the Deployment Filter field

Select saved

query

Export Database Customizations Continued

Page 1220: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1220/1241

Determine order of data type deployment in the Applic

Deployment Manager > Data Type Explorer view

Select parent data type in the Data Types applet, then

type in child applet

State Model

(parent) type…

…depends on

LOV (child) type

Export Database Customizations Continued

Page 1221: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1221/1241

Navigate to Application Deployment Manager > Deplo

Sessions

Create a new session and specify project name

Deploy the session Select Export to File, then specify export destination

1. Select Project

Name

4. File prefix isSession Id

2. Click Deploy

3. Specify

export path

Export Repository Customizations

Page 1222: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1222/1241

Use Siebel Tools to export repository customizations

Files created during export include:

 A .sif file containing the changes

 A deployment descriptor file (XML)

 A log file of export steps and status

Tools offers two methods for exporting customizations

Hot fix: typically a small set of hand-selected modificati

Mid-level release: repository changes after a specified

List of objects may be edited after it is generated

Export Repository Customizations Continued

Page 1223: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1223/1241

To create a hot fix in Siebel Tools:

1. Select the object definition to add to the hot fix

2. Right-click and select Add to Hot-Fix

3. Specify a name for the hot fix

4. Return to Tools’ Object Explorer and List Editor to add

object definitions

5. When done, click Export

Hot fix output is saved in …\Tools\ADM\<HF Name>

Export Repository Customizations Continued

Page 1224: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1224/1241

To create a mid-level release in Siebel Tools:

1. Navigate to View > Options > General and set Change

specify the cutoff date for the release

2. Select Tools > Generate Mid-Level Release

3. Provide a name for the release and click Generate List

4. Verify list contents and delete entries if necessary

5. Click Export

Package is created in …\Tools\ADM\<MLR name>

Objects modifiedsince Start Date

Move File Customizations

Page 1225: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1225/1241

File type customizations do not need to be exported u

Siebel client or Siebel Tools

Move files to the correct directory in the package tree (

later)

The type for a custom Siebel Repository File (.srf) is F

Repository

Create an ADM Package

Page 1226: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1226/1241

 An ADM package is a collection of application custom

and includes:

 A directory structure that organizes different types of

customization (database, repository, and file )

 An ADM package descriptor file describing its contents

 ADM includes a utility, admpkgr, which can create an

 ADM package

Runs from command line

 ADM packager syntax:

% admpkgr <init | generate | validate> < 

Steps to create a package:

 A. Create an empty package structure

B. Populate the package directory structure

C. Generate the package descriptor file

D. Validate the package

A. Create an Empty Package

Page 1227: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1227/1241

Invoke admpkgr with the init command to create an e

package directory structure

Command syntax:

% admpkgr init < package name with path >

Example:

Package

location

Empty package

directory

structure

B. Populate the Package Directory Structure

Page 1228: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1228/1241

Database and repository exports and file modification

be moved to the new package directory tree

For database type, move the .xml file containing data +

file

For repository type, move the .sif file + the descriptor fi

For file type modifications, the package sub-directory d

the file category:

Repository file (.SRF): < pkgdir >\file\AppServer\objects\<la

Web templates: < pkgdir >\file\AppServer\webtempl\<lang>

Images, CSS files, browser script files:< pkgdir >\file\AppServer\webmaster\<lang>

Report files: < pkgdir >\file\ReportServer\<lang >

Unused package sub-directories should be deleted

C. Generate the Package Descriptor File

I ki d k ith th t d

Page 1229: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1229/1241

Invoking admpkgr with the generate command:

Validates package directory contents

Calculates a checksum to ensure future integrity of the

Creates a package descriptor file for the package

Command syntax:

% admpkgr generate < package name with path >

Example:

Package

descriptor file

D. Validate the Package

I ki d k ith th lid t d

Page 1230: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1230/1241

Invoking admpkgr with the validate command:

Verifies the existence and format of package descripto

Checks for empty folders and redundant units

Performs consistency checks for units

Checks for the existence of valid unit files and descript

database and repository types

Using validate is optional

Command syntax:

% admpkgr validate < package name with path >

Example:

Deploy the Package

Th ADM d li i t f (CLI) d t

Page 1231: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1231/1241

The ADM command-line interface (CLI) command set

executed on the Management Server host

Commands contained in a batch file created by a Perl s

bundled with the Management Server 

Batch file is named deploy_<enterprise name>.bat

Example: if enterprise name = Siebel, then ADM CLI batc

named deploy_Siebel.bat

Typically created in …\<mgmt server install dir >\bin

 ADM commands take command-line arguments:

Command name User name

Password

Package name

Optional switches

Deploy the Package: Commands Overview

The ADM CLI s pports both req ired and optional com

Page 1232: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1232/1241

The ADM CLI supports both required and optional com

Commands execute in a specific order 

delete

acknowledge

status

restore_activate

restore_copy

restore_session

activate

optional

required

Management

Server 

 valent

load

create

 validate

backup

copy

Target

Enterprise

covered in thi

Deploy the Package: Load

Call load command to put references to package cont

Page 1233: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1233/1241

Source

Enterprise

Call load command to put references to package cont

the orchestration environment’s database

Validates package structure and checksum

Uses package descriptor file to map package contents

Management Server database

Command syntax:deploy_<enterprise > load <user > < passwor

< package name >

Example:User/password Pack

Orchestration

Environment

Deploy the Package: Create

Call create to initiate a deployment session

Page 1234: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1234/1241

Call create to initiate a deployment session

Command syntax:deploy_<enterprise > create <user > < passw

< package name >

Example:

Orchestration

Environment

New

Session

Deploy the Package: Copy

Call copy to move package contents to destination en

Page 1235: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1235/1241

Call copy to move package contents to destination en

Uses the appropriate copy method for each type of cus

Repository changes are copied to target repository

Database changes are loaded into target database

File changes are moved to correct location in target file sy

Command syntax:deploy_<enterprise > copy <user > < passwor< package >

Example:

Orchestration

Environment

Deploy the Package: Activate

Call activate to perform any steps required to make

Page 1236: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1236/1241

Call activate to perform any steps required to make

customizations available to users

Most data types do not require activation

Example: Proposal Template

 Activation examples:

LOV activation clears the LOV cache

Workflow process activation sets the process to Active

Image, CSS file, or Web template file activation propagate

server 

Command syntax:deploy_<enterprise > activate <user > < pas

< package name >

Example:

Deploy the Package: Status and Acknowledge

Call status to get information about the deployment st

Page 1237: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1237/1241

Call status to get information about the deployment st

package

Gives a summary of deployment status of units in the p

Use status_detail to see status information for each un

To complete a command-line deployment, call acknow

Ends deployment session

Sets session status to complete in Management Serve

Removes backup package data from Management Ser

Status example:

Deploy the Package: Other Commands

Other optional ADM CLI functions include:

Page 1238: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1238/1241

Other optional ADM CLI functions include:

Deletes package references and sessio

Siebel Management Serverdelete

Lists packages deployed by Siebel Man

Serverlist

Sequence of commands that allows roldeployment

restore_session,

restore_copy,

restore_activate

Creates backup copy of target enterpris

will be affected by deploymentbackup

Performs checks on target enterprise b

deploymentvalidate

Validates enterprise profile filevalent

DescriptionCommand

Module Highlights

Export application customizations using:

Page 1239: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1239/1241

Export application customizations using:

Siebel Tools for repository modifications

The ADM screen in the Siebel client for database modi

File copy into package for file modifications

Use the ADM packager utility to bundle modifications

deployment to the target enterprise

Execute commands from the ADM CLI to deploy an A

package:

Load the package

Create a deployment session

Copy the package to the target environment

 Activate the customizations (optional)

Status to verify correct deployment

 Acknowledge to end the deployment session

Lab

In the lab you will:

Page 1240: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1240/1241

In the lab you will:

Export repository and database customizations

Create an ADM package

Use the ADM CLI to deploy this package

Page 1241: Siebels Sppt

8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1241/1241